bentley instrumentation and wiring design fundamentals v8i(ss1) edition trn011660 10002 megacad...

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

TRN011660-1/0002

Bentley Instrumentation & Wiring DesignV8i (SELECTseries1)

Bentley Institute Course Guide

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Trademarks

AccuDraw, Bentley, the “B” Bentley logo, MDL, MicroStation and SmartLine are registered trademarks; PopSet and Raster Manager are trademarks; Bentley SELECT is a service mark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc.

AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.

All other brands and product names are the trademarks of their respective owners.

Patents

United States Patent Nos. 5,8.15,415 and 5,784,068 and 6,199,125.

Copyrights

©2000-2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated. MicroStation ©1998 Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All rights reserved.

Bentley Instrumentation & Wiring Design ii Feb-10Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Feb-10

Table of Contents

Bentley Instrumentation & Wiring Design

Course Overview ____________________________________ 1Course Description ____________________________________1

Modular Format ___________________________________1Datasets__________________________________________2

Target Audience_______________________________________3Prerequisites _________________________________________3Course Objectives _____________________________________3Modules Included _____________________________________3

Bentley Project Administrator Fundamentals

Course Overview ____________________________________ 7Course Description ____________________________________7Target Audience_______________________________________7Prerequisites _________________________________________7Course Objectives _____________________________________7Modules Included _____________________________________8Systems Requirements _________________________________8AutoCAD® or related Autodesk® Products __________________8ProjectWise Supported Versions__________________________9Databases Supported __________________________________9

Project Setup _______________________________________ 11Overview ____________________________________________11Prerequisites _________________________________________11Objectives ___________________________________________12Introductory Knowledge ________________________________12

Questions ________________________________________12Answers__________________________________________12

Sharing Design Data____________________________________13Project Administrator __________________________________14User Configurations ____________________________________15Creating Project Root Directories _________________________16

1 OpenPlant PowerPID CustomizationCopyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

OpenPlant PowerP

Table of Contents

Creating a Project _____________________________________18Module Review _______________________________________23


Course Summary ____________________________________ 27Course Summary ______________________________________27Course Review ________________________________________28


Bentley Instrumentation and Wiring Fundamentals

Course Overview ____________________________________ 33Description___________________________________________33Target Audience_______________________________________33Prerequisites _________________________________________33Objectives ___________________________________________33Modules Included _____________________________________34System Requirements __________________________________34

Items no longer supported: __________________________35Upgrading Legacy Projects ______________________________36Introductory Knowledge ________________________________37


Installing the Training Project ____________________________37New Features of I&W __________________________________39

Getting Started _____________________________________ 41Module Overview _____________________________________41Module Prerequisites __________________________________41Module Objectives_____________________________________41Starting Instrumentation & Wiring ________________________42A TOUR OF THE MAIN INTERFACE_________________________43

Menu Command Functions___________________________43Layout Designer _______________________________________54

A Tour Of Layout Designer ___________________________56Module Review _______________________________________64

Questions: ________________________________________64Answers: _________________________________________64

ID Customization 2 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Feb-10

Table of Contents

Building Loop Components ____________________________ 65Module Overview _____________________________________65Module Prerequisites __________________________________65Module Objectives_____________________________________65Building Loop Components ______________________________66Create a Loop Standard _________________________________82Create a Loop from Standards____________________________84Create New Loop from Instrument created in Data Manager ___88Module Review _______________________________________92


Building Field and Card Panels _________________________ 93Module Overview _____________________________________93Module Prerequisites __________________________________93Module Objectives_____________________________________93Building Field and Card Panels ___________________________94

Building a Field Panel _______________________________94Creating a Field Panel Standard __________________________100Creating a Field Panel from Standards _____________________101Creating New Card Panels _______________________________104Adding a Landing Strip for Incoming Wiring _________________108Module Review _______________________________________113


Data Manipulation __________________________________ 115Module Overview _____________________________________115Module Prerequisites __________________________________115Module Objectives_____________________________________115Data Manipulation_____________________________________116

Tools for the Views _________________________________116Adding and Deleting Components from the Views ________122

Assigning Project Standards _____________________________124System Queries _______________________________________128Reports______________________________________________129Instrument Templates __________________________________130Electrical Templates____________________________________131Macros ______________________________________________131Tables_______________________________________________132Module Review _______________________________________133



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

OpenPlant PowerP

Table of Contents

Layout Designer: Connecting Components _______________ 135Module Overview _____________________________________135Module Prerequisites __________________________________135Module Objectives_____________________________________135____________________________________________________135Layout Designer: Connecting Components__________________136

Creating a Layout Drawing ___________________________136Connecting Components ________________________________143Module Review _______________________________________155


Layout Utilities _____________________________________ 157Module Overview _____________________________________157Module Prerequisites __________________________________157Module Objectives_____________________________________157Layout Designer Utilities ________________________________158

Adding a borders___________________________________158Making an assembly ________________________________162Component Bar ____________________________________165Association _______________________________________166

Creating and Designing Terminal strips and Cables ___________168Creating New Layouts __________________________________172Module Review _______________________________________176


Instrumentation Drawings ____________________________ 177Module Overview _____________________________________177Module Prerequisites __________________________________177Module Objectives_____________________________________177Instrumentation Drawings_______________________________178Templates ___________________________________________182Module Review _______________________________________189


Powered Instrument Loop ____________________________ 191Module Overview _____________________________________191Module Prerequisites __________________________________191Module Objectives_____________________________________191Creating a Powered Loop _______________________________192Add Loop to the Layout _________________________________195Creating an Electrical Panel ______________________________200Completing the Loop ___________________________________205


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Feb-10

Table of Contents

Module Review _______________________________________208Questions: ________________________________________208Answers: _________________________________________208

Intrinsically Safe Loop ________________________________ 209Module Overview _____________________________________209Module Prerequisites __________________________________209Module Objectives_____________________________________209Building an Intrinsically Safe Loop_________________________210Connecting the Loop ___________________________________220Module Review _______________________________________227




Bentley FOUNDATION Fieldbus Fundamentals

Course Overview ____________________________________ 235Course Description ____________________________________235Target Audience_______________________________________235Prerequisites _________________________________________236Course Objectives _____________________________________236Modules Included _____________________________________237System Requirements __________________________________237

Items no longer supported: __________________________238Installing the Training Project ____________________________239FOUNDATION Fieldbus Features __________________________241

Composite Drawings ________________________________241Network Topologies____________________________________243FOUNDATION Fieldbus Terminology_______________________244

Building a FOUNDATION Fieldbus Segment ______________ 245Module Overview _____________________________________245Module Prerequisites __________________________________245Module Objectives_____________________________________245Building Fieldbus Components ___________________________246Module Review _______________________________________266



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

OpenPlant PowerP

Table of Contents

Building FOUNDATION Fieldbus Panels __________________ 267Module Overview _____________________________________267Module Prerequisites __________________________________267Module Objectives_____________________________________267Building Fieldbus Panels ________________________________268

Building a Fieldbus Panel with a Single Brick and No Terminator _______________________________________268

Module Review _______________________________________288Questions ________________________________________288Answers__________________________________________288

Building I/O Card Panels for H1 Cards ___________________ 289Module Overview _____________________________________289Module Prerequisites __________________________________289Module Objectives_____________________________________289Creating New I/O Card Panels ____________________________290Designing the H1 Card __________________________________294Designing the H1 Card Terminal Strips _____________________297Creating the Power Conditioners _________________________299Module Review _______________________________________305


Layout Designer: Connecting Components _______________ 307Module Overview _____________________________________307Module Prerequisites __________________________________307Module Objectives_____________________________________307Layout Designer: Connecting Components__________________308Creating a Document___________________________________314Module Review _______________________________________316


Using a Multiplexer in a Segment ______________________ 317Module Overview _____________________________________317Module Prerequisites __________________________________317Module Objectives_____________________________________317Designing a New Segment with Multiplexer _________________318Designing a new FOUNDATION Fieldbus Panel_______________330Creating a Multi core cable for Marshalling Panel ____________340Modifying the Card Panel _______________________________343Connecting Components ________________________________348Module Review _______________________________________356



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Feb-10

Table of Contents



Bentley Datasheets Fundamentals


Items no longer supported: __________________________365Introductory Knowledge ________________________________366


Installing the Training Project ____________________________367

Create, Modify and Revise a Datasheet __________________ 369Module Overview _____________________________________369Module Prerequisites __________________________________369Module Objectives_____________________________________369Create a Datasheet ____________________________________370Modifying a Datasheet _________________________________375Revising a Datasheet ___________________________________377Module Review _______________________________________379


Mapped Datasheets _________________________________ 381Module Overview _____________________________________381Module Prerequisites __________________________________381Module Objectives_____________________________________381Mapped Datasheets____________________________________382 Module Review _______________________________________390


Bulk Datasheets ____________________________________ 391Module Overview _____________________________________391Module Prerequisites __________________________________391


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

OpenPlant PowerP

Table of Contents

Module Objectives_____________________________________391Bulk Datasheet Builder _________________________________392Module Review _______________________________________396




Bentley Hookups Fundamentals


Items no longer supported: __________________________403Introductory Knowledge ________________________________404


Installing the Training Project ____________________________405

Creating and Modifying a Hookup ______________________ 407Module Overview _____________________________________407Module Prerequisites __________________________________407Module Objectives_____________________________________407Creating a Hookup _____________________________________408Creating a Bill of Material _______________________________414Modifying a Hookup ___________________________________417Revise a Hookup ______________________________________422Module Review _______________________________________424





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Course Overview
Course Description

Modular Format

This instructor-led course is designed in a modular format. Although each module can stand alone, for your convenience they have been bound into one book to include:

AutoPLANT Project Administrator Fundamentals

As an introduction to the course, the student learns how to create a new project using the Administrator utility application. The training project includes predefined instrument tags.

Instrumentation & Wiring Fundamentals

Using the Instrumentation & Wiring application the student learns to develop a set of project deliverables using engineering standard documentation file formats, such as .dgn, dwg, .dxf, and ODBC compliant databases. The student creates detailed wiring configurations from the instrument to the control system, creating loop and termination diagrams.

Foundation Fieldbus Fundamentals

Using the Foundation Fieldbus technology, students build digital, serial, two-way communication systems that allow the connection of intelligent instruments to a DCS system. This powerful technology can reduce installation costs, simplify planning and improves operating reliability.

Feb-10 1 Course Overview

Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Course Description

Datasheets Fundamentals

Using Datasheets the student learns to access and manage dynamically-passed process and instrumentation data, create and print a datasheet, as well as modify a linked datasheet field.

Hookups Fundamentals

Using Hookups and Microsoft Excel as the native data storage format, the student learns how to create, print and revise a hookup drawing, as well as modify a linked hookup field. Students create a Bill of Materials from a selected set of drawings for the relevant hookup type.

Datasets

This course has been created by combining modules into a typical Learning Path.

This modular design enables a student to complete a course at their own pace from the On Demand eLearning environment or combined from specific modules into an open enrollment course.

The image below shows the progress through each module. Datasets are cumulative. This means that where ever a dataset is installed, that module becomes a new “Point of Entry” on the learning path. All prerequisite data has been included in each dataset.

As a student in the Open Enrollment course you will only need to install one dataset at the start of your course.

Course Overview 2 Feb-10Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Target Audience

Target Audience

This course is recommended for the following audience(s):

• Beginner instrumentation designers and drafters.

Prerequisites

• Bentley Microstation V8 or AutoCAD

• Students should have a minimum of six months experience with either application.

Course Objectives

After completing this course, you will be able to:

• Use the Bentley Instrumentation & Wiring application as a tool to increase your productivity when generating instrumentation documents.

•

Modules Included

The following modules are included in this course:

• Project Administrator Fundamentals

• Instrumentation & Wiring Fundamentals

• FOUNDATION Fieldbus Fundamentals

• Datasheet Fundamentals

• Hookups Fundamentals

Feb-10 3 Course OverviewCopyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Modules Included


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

TRN011020-1/0003

Bentley Project Administrator FundamentalsV8i (SELECTseries 1)


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Trademarks



All ther brands and product names are the trademarks of their respective owners.

Patents


Copyrights


Bentley Project Administrator Fundamentals 6 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Course Overview
Course Description

This course is designed to give the new user an overview of the methods used to create the project environment. Using the Project Administrator utility application delivered with the AutoPLANT install, you will learn how to create a project root directory, and set up a simulated training project.

Target Audience


• This course is designed for the new user of Bentley AutoPLANT software. It is designed for the project managers who will create and manage the project environment.

Prerequisites

• There are no prerequisites for this course. This is an overview to the more advanced administrator courses.

Course Objectives


• The primary objective for this course is to give the user a basic understanding of how a project is created. The student will learn the importance of managing the models and documents created by the AutoPLANT 2D and 3D applications.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Modules Included

Modules Included


• Project Setup

Systems Requirements

You must have a CD drive or internet access for product installation. The following prerequisites are required to run the modules included in AutoPLANT Plant Design V8i (SELECTseries1) or AutoPLANT P&ID Design V8i (SELECTseries1).

AutoCAD® or related Autodesk® Products

Processor: Intel Pentium 4 processor and AMD Athlon, 3.0 GHz or greater or Intel or AMD Dual Core Processor, 2.0 GHz or greater

Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP2 or later, Windows Vista 32 bit SP. Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP1A or later

Internet: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 or greater

Memory: 2GB or greater

Hard Disk 2GB minimum free hard disk space

Input Device: Industry-standard input device supported by Windows

Output Device: Industry-standard output device supported by Windows

Video Graphics Card: Industry-standard video card/monitor

Databases Supported: Oracle 9i or 10g, SQL Server 7, 2000 and 2005, MS Access 2000, XP or 2003 and MSDE 2000 databases

AutoCAD: 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009

AutoCAD Mechanical Desktop:

2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008

Architectural Desktop:

2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

ProjectWise Supported Versions

Note: The latest applicable service packs must be used for all of the above products.

ProjectWise Supported Versions

Bentley ProjectWise V8 08.11.05

Databases Supported

Note: No dataset is required for this course.

Building Systems:

2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008

AutoCAD Mechanical:

2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008

Microsoft Access:

2000, 2002, 2003, 2007

SQLServer: 2000, 2003, 2005, MSDE and SQL Server Express

Oracle: Oracle 9i Release 2, Oracle 10g Release 2, Oracle 11g Release 1


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Databases Supported


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Project Setup
Overview

A Project Manager's primary focus is on creating finished project deliverables. Daily tasks involve making sure issues relative to modeling techniques, piping specifications and implementation of company standards are all on track.

To support this effort, Bentley designed the Plant Process & Instrumentation and 3D Plant Design applications to allow the project teams to work within a concurrent engineering environment for all aspects of functional, schematic, and physical plant design.

By using a central database as a project repository, the applications for both 2D and 3D can easily share the same data. Data can be edited on a project-wide basis, drastically reducing the time it takes to bring a data-intensive project to completion. Managers also appreciate the wealth of reports that can be generated from a centralized system.

This course will give you a basic understanding of how a project is created and why it is important to manage the drawing files and data repository.

Prerequisites

Students should have a minimum of six months experience with AutoCAD® functionality and some familiarity with AutoPLANT commands and concepts.

Feb-10 11 Project Setup


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Objectives

Objectives

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Use the Project Administrator utility program to create a new project root directory.

• User the Project Administrator utility program to create a new project.

Introductory Knowledge

Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.

AutoPLANT applications provide additional productivity functions to your native AutoCAD® application. Although it is not the intention of this course to teach basic AutoCAD®, these review questions will help you assess your current knowledge prior to beginning the AutoPLANT course.

Identify the following statements as either True or False. The answers to each question are provided in detail.

Questions

1 True/False: AutoPLANT drawing units function the same way as AutoCAD®.

2 True/False: In Microsoft Windows the top level directory is referred to as the "root" directory.

Answers

1 True: All units function in the same way in both AutoPLANT and AutoCAD®. Units are set for both length and angle during the project setup phase.

2 True: In Microsoft Windows®, a top level directory may be referred to as the root directory. The Project Administrator utility will enable you to create a Project Root directory at any level in your computer's file structure. Multiple projects may be set up under the Project Root directory.

Project Setup 12 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Sharing Design Data

Sharing Design Data

AutoPLANT includes a set of integrated design and modeling tools. Some of these applications, such as AutoPLANT P&ID, Piping and Equipment require AutoCAD® to function. The database applications utilize Microsoft Access® and Microsoft Excel®. All of these tools provide fast layout and design of intelligent components.

This intelligent design philosophy enables the user to input component data once and let the information cascade throughout the life of the project. Data is stored within a centralized database which is easily accessed by all members of the project team.

Many applications support the common scenario of sending documents to off-site design offices and vendors and then re-synchronizing the off-site design data with the central project database.

To facilitate data sharing, a project must first be created. This function is usually performed by the Project Administrator, using a set of tools installed with the AutoPLANT applications.

These projects will contain custom configurations for all drawing and model defaults and settings.

Once a project environment is defined, all models and drawings associated with the project are managed and stored in the appropriate locations. Sharing of design data is tightly regulated, preserving the database integrity.

Feb-10 13 Project SetupCopyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Project Administrator

Project Administrator

During the AutoPLANT installation, various core and utility applications, common to both the 2D and 3D programs are installed under the AutoPLANT group icon.

The Project Administrator utility enables you to create and manage custom projects. From the interface you can edit the database configurations and control system administration functions such as security access to critical data.

A new project is typically created by the Administrator before modeling has begun.

Open the utility from Start > Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Project Tools > Project Administrator.

The navigation tree on the left is where you access specific project properties. The C:\Bentley Plant V8i Projects directory is a top level directory and referred to as a Project Root directory.

The directory level below the root directory contains sample projects that are delivered with the install.

• SAMPLE_IMPERIAL

• SAMPLE_METRIC

• SAMPLE MMETRIC


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

User Configurations

These sample project files are not recommended for production use, but are used as templates for building your own projects.

User Configurations

AutoPLANT is designed to support multiple projects. This design enables you to define the units, specs, drawing database format, borders, drawing templates, module and component options, in a specific configuration.

To support this implementation, sample configuration files were created to serve as placeholders for the definition of configuration defaults and settings. By using the samples you can remove the tedious effort that would be required to manually edit these configuration files when creating a custom configuration.

You can see an example of the file structure beneath the User Configuration directory. You will use the User Configuration Sample Imperial to create a new project.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating Project Root Directories


There are no rules as to how many Project Root directories an organization uses or how many projects are contained within the project root.

A Project Root directory can be at any level of your computer's file structure. The path to that folder is referred to as %PROJECT_ROOT% throughout the AutoPLANT course documentation.

Project Root directories usually reside in a different file path than your AutoPLANT installation, so the path to the installation is shown as %NETWORK_ROOT% throughout the AutoPLANT course documentation.

Note: Although not visible in the Bentley Project Administrator dialog, the system has created a file called at_proj.dbf that resides in this project root directory. This file contains a record for every project that is created under this specific root directory.

The following exercises will give you exposure to Project Administrator functionality. You will create a directory structure in preparation for the 2D and 3D Fundamental courses.

Once directories have been set up, they are ready for the installation of a pre-defined project dataset.

Exercise 1: Create a new Project Root directory.

1 Select Start > Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Project Tools > Project Administrator.

2 Select User Configurations.

3 Select File > Add Root.

4 Select the appropriate drive.

This course will use the C:\drive.

5 In the Browse for Folder dialog, click Make New Folder.

6 Name the folder Bentley Training Project.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


7 Click OK.

The software returns to the Project Administrator interface with the new Project Root directory called Bentley Training Project listed in the navigation tree.

Now that the Root Directory has been defined, you will create the project.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Project

Creating a Project

When a new project is created, the user needs to specify the basic criteria. The following information provides an overview of the type of information you will input.

Provider Type

This is the database program that will be used for storing the project data. AutoPLANT can write to Microsoft Access®, MSDE®, SQL Server®, and Oracle®. (Only those installed on the computer will be available for selection.)

Base Template and 3D Settings

When you create a new project, the seed files that are required to build the project are copied from the %NETWORK_ROOT%\Base and %NETWORK_ROOT%\config directories. (%NETWORK_ROOT% refers to the path of your AutoPLANT installation and is most likely C:\Program Files\Bentley\Plant V8i.) These directories act as a "master project" and are installed with the application.

AutoPLANT provides two project templates: Standard Base Project and KKS. KKS acts as the European counterpart to the Standard Base Project. These templates contain the Bentley P&ID and AutoPLANT Plant Design standards and data structures.

Note: Creation of new project templates is covered in the 2D and 3D Administrator courses.

The 3D Modeling Project Settings that you select will indicate which configuration data files will be copied over to create the new project files.

The Units field defines the drawing and model defaults including units, specs, drawing database format, borders, drawing templates, modules and component options. These configurations were installed in your directory.

The Use Central Project Mode check box is only available when you select SQL Server® or Oracle® database provider types.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Project

Project Paths

By default, all project data is stored in a collection of folders in the %PROJECT_ROOT% directory. You can, however, specify different paths for specific data types in the New Project - New Project Paths dialog.

To edit a path, click in the field and either double-click or click Browse to open a Browse For Folder dialog.

Details

Of the details that can be defined in this dialog, the Project Name is the only attribute that is required.

Optional details include: Project Number, Project Description, Client Name, Client Number, and Client Location.

Exercise 2: Create the Training Project.

1 Select C:\Bentley Training Project.

2 Right-click and select New Project, or select File > New Project from the menu.

Note: You can also use the Ctrl+N keystroke.

3 Select Access

4 Click Next.

5 Select Standard Base Project in the Select the Base Schematic Template list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Project

6 Select Imperial Units from the Units list.

Note: This course will use the Imperial Units. The table below shows the options that are available for the additional units.

7 Click Next.

8 Click Next on the New Project Paths dialog.

9 Enter project details as shown below.

Attribute Imperial Metric Mixed Metric

Project Template

Standard Base Project



Units Imperial Metric Mixed Metric


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Project

Note: Project Name is required while all of the other fields are optional. The Project Name can be no more than 16 characters.

10 The Project Name is automatically displayed in the Project Description field. Overwrite this with the description listed above.

11 Click Finish.

AutoPLANT copies the default project settings into your new project.

When the process is complete, the new project will appear under the Bentley Training Project directory.

12 Click + to expand your new project.

You will notice directories for all project related data including specific directories for all drawings and data that will be created using both the 2D and 3D applications.

Attribute Imperial Metric Mixed Metric

Project Name Training Training Training

Project Description

Imperial Training Project

Metric Training Project

Mixed Metric Training Project


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Project

13 Close Project Administrator.

You have now completed this short course in preparation for using the 2D or 3D applications.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review

Now that you have completed this module, let’s measure what you have learned.

Questions

1 What is the definition of %Project_Root% and %Network_Root%?

2 What is the only required field in the Details dialog when creating a new project?

3 True/False: The Project Description field is populated with the Project Name automatically?

4 True/False: The Project Description field has to maintain the same name as the Project Name?

5 What are the two types of base templates for project creation provided by AutoPLANT?

Answers

1 The %Project_Root% is the variable that contains the path to your project root directory. The %NETWORK_ROOT% is the path of the installation.

2 The only required field in the Details dialog is the Project Name, all others are optional.

3 True: The Project Description field is populated with the Project Name.

4 False: The Project Description does not have to be the same as the Project Name; it is preferable that it contain more description information about the project.

5 The Standard Base project template and the KKS project template.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Course Summary
Course Summary

Now you will be able to:

• Create a new project root directory.

• Create a new project.

Feb-10 27 Course Summary


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Course Review

Course Review

Now that you have completed this course, let’s measure what you have learned.

Questions

1 Which two project templates does AutoPLANT provide?

2 AutoPLANT can write to several database providers, name them.

3 What type of data repository will allow for sharing of data between 2D and 3D applications?

4 What is a root directory?

Course Summary 28 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Course Review

Answers

1 AutoPLANT provides two project templates: Standard Base Project and KKS.

2 AutoPLANT can write to Microsoft Access®, MSDE®, SQL Server®, and Oracle®.

3 By using a central database as a project repository, the applications for both 2D and 3D can easily share the same data.

4 A root directory is the directory containing multiple projects.

Feb-10 29 Course SummaryCopyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Course Review


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

TRN010330-1/0002

Bentley Instrumentation and Wiring FundamentalsV8i (SELECTseries1)


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Trademarks




Patents


Copyrights


Bentley Instrumentation and Wiring Fundamentals 32 Feb-10Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Course Overview
Description

The Bentley software suites communicate with each other by using a set of relational databases. When projects are created an empty set of databases are generated. Data from the software applications are then collected and shared among the applications. Instrumentation tags can be created within the Instrumentation software or within Data Manager or even within a P&ID.

Target Audience

This course is designed for novice instrumentation designers and drafters. The course could also be used as a refresher course for more advanced users who have not used the software for a time.

Prerequisites

• Bentley Microstation V8 or AutoCAD

• Students should have a minimum of six months experience with either application.

Objectives

This course is intended for new and existing users. Our goal is to train students to begin using the Bentley Instrumentation & Wiring application as a tool to increase their productivity when creating instrumentation documents. A user experienced with previous versions of Bentley software will learn the concepts introduced with the new product as quickly as possible.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Modules Included

Modules Included

• Getting Started

• Building Loop Components

• Building Field and Card Panels

• Data Manipulation

• Layout Designer: Connecting Components

• Layout Designer: Functionality

• Instrumentation Drawings

• Building a Powered Loop

• Building an Intrinsically Safe Loop

System Requirements

You must have a CD drive or Internet access for product installation. The following prerequisites are required to run the modules included in Instrumentation & Wiring V8i Edition:

Processor: Intel Pentium4 processor or AMD Athlon, 3.0 GHz or greater. Intel or AMD Dual Core processor, 2.0 GHz or greater.

Operating System:

Microsoft Windows XP Professional, SP2 or later. Microsoft Windows Vista 32 bit SP1.

Internet: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or greater.

Memory: 1GB minimum (More memory typically results in better performance.)

Hard Disk: 2GB minimum free hard disk space.

Input Device: Any industry-standard input device supported by Microsoft Windows.

Output Device: Any industry-standard output device supported by Microsoft Windows.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

System Requirements

Items no longer supported:

• Microsoft Office 97, 2000, XP

• Microsoft Windows 3.1x, 95, 98, ME, NT 3.x, NT4.x, 2000

• AutoCAD 2000,2002, 2003, 2004, 2005

• Bentley ProjectWise XM 8.9.4 (and earlier)

• Bentley Microstation XM 8.9.3 (and earlier)

• ORACLE 81, 9i

Video Graphics Card:

1280 x 1024 32-bit color video display adapter (true color) 128 MB or greater. OpenGL or Direct3D capable workstation class graphics card. For Microsoft Windows Vista, a Direct3D capable workstation class graphics card with 128 MB or greater is required.

Document Management:

Bentley ProjectWise V8i (8.11.5)

Cad Engines: MicroStation V8i (8.11.5) or AutoCAD 2006, 2007, 2008 (32 bit), 2009 (32 bit). AutoCAD is only required for editing Instrumentation and Wiring template and symbols.

Microsoft Office: Microsoft Office 2003 SP3, 2007 SP1. Required for reporting and Data Sheet/Hook Up creation.

DatabasesSupported:

Microsoft Access 2003, 2007. Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express Edition, 2005 Express Edition with Advanced Services, 2005 Standard Edition, 2005 Enterprise Edition. Oracle 10g Release 2 (v10.2.0.3 & v10.2.0.4). Oracle 11g Release 1 (v11.1.0.6).


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Upgrading Legacy Projects

Upgrading Legacy Projects

Note: All legacy projects - pre-V8i (SELECTseries1) must be upgraded to V8i (SELECTseries1) using the Integrity Checker tools found within Project Administrator V8i (SELECTseries1). This upgrade must be performed before any project work is attempted using the V8i (SELECTseries1) applications.

Exercise 1: Upgrading a project to V8i (SELECTseries1)

1 Start Project Administrator V8i (SELECTseries1).

2 Select Edit > Preferences.

3 Select the Integrity Check tab.

4 Set Enable Integrity Check Engine Globally.

See Project Administrator Help for descriptions of other Integrity Check options.

5 Click OK.

6 Select a project to be upgraded from the project root tree.

Project Administrator V8i (SELECTseries1) now performs an Integrity Check on the selected project.

If you set the Integrity Report option, the integrity check results can be viewed by double-clicking the file <project name>\Integrity.xml.

7 Right-click on the project to upgrade in the project root tree and select Upgrade > From Integrity Check Results.

Project Administrator V8i (SELECTseries1) now upgrades the selected project.

Note: Individual projects in a multi-project database can not be upgraded individually. Project Administrator will upgrade all the projects in a multi-project database.

Note: Upgrading individual (single database) projects in the project roots that contain many projects is possible. Therefore new V8i (SELECTseries1) projects, upgraded V8i (SELECTseries1) projects and pre-V8i (SELECTseries1) projects can coexist in the same project root.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



Before you begin this module, let’s define what you already know.

Questions

1 True/False: Monitoring of plant process systems is achieved by using instruments.

2 True/False: Instruments shown on a P&ID are graphical images only.

Answers

1 True, plants use instruments to monitor and control process systems.

2 False, Instruments shown on a P&ID are graphical images with data linked to project databases that are shared between the AutoPLANT software suites.

Installing the Training Project

Prior to starting Instrumentation and Wiring, a project must be created. A project has been provided for your convenience. You will need to unzip this project onto the drive of your choice. The exercise below installs the project onto the C:\ drive.

Note: For Training purposes, the provided project was created using the Access database format, however; Instrumentation and Wiring does not support the Access database format for multi-user projects. Bentley recommends that no less than the MSDE database format be used. SQL and Oracle databases provide the most stable environments for building projects to be used by multi-users.

Exercise 1: Installing the Training Project.

1 Make sure all AutoPLANT applications are closed.

2 Download the file AP_FV8i_IW.exe and place on your desktop.

3 Press Unzip.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


4 Extract to the root directory of the C drive (C:\)

5 Press Close.

6 From your Windows Start menu, select Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Project Tools > Project Administrator.

7 From the File menu, press Add Root to display the Browse for Folder dialog.

Note: In order for this option to be available in the File menu, you must select something at the primary root level of the navigation tree because you cannot create a project root directory under a project directory.

8 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select C:\Bentley Training Project.

9 Press OK to accept the name.

Note: The project root folder, C:\ Bentley Training Project now appears in the navigation tree at a primary level.

Additional training on the Project Administrator utility is covered in the AutoPLANT Administrator training courses.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

New Features of I&W

New Features of I&W

Separate Multiplexer Segment Drawings

Users now have the option to generate Foundation Fieldbus segment drawings that show the complete segment (including multiplexers), or to split the segment into separate drawings. The connections to the brick (or Megablock) can be displayed on one drawing sheet and the connections to the multiplexers on separate drawing sheets. This prevents complex segment drawings - that incorporate multiplexers - from becoming too cluttered.

Terminators on H1 I/O Cards

Users now have the ability to specify that the H1 card managing a segments(s) has a built-in segment terminator.

Composite Drawing Functionality Applicable to any Tstrip Tag Type

The composite drawing functionality developed to generate segment drawings can now be applied to other drawing types. This is achieved by adding the tstrip tag type to a list of tag types that the composite drawing functionality can recognize. These tstrip tag types can be user-defined as well as BASE tstrip tag types. This enhancement can be used to generate drawings where the instrument connections vary from drawing to drawing.

Bulk Datasheet Builder Updating Supplemental Tables

The Bulk Datasheet Builder tool can now leverage data from supplemental tables added by users, not just the BASE schema tables.

Increased I&W Print Range Selection

A limitation in the number of tstrips that could be selected as the print range for drawing generation has been removed.

Increase to the Amount of Cards Selected for CARD-LOOP Drawings

A limitation in the number of I/O cards that could be selected for the generation of CARD-LOOP type drawings has been removed.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

New Features of I&W

Performance Improvements

Performance improvements have been made relating to application startup and data navigation (especially when running on ORACLE and in multi-project mode).

Multiple Defects Addressed

Critical, Major and Intermediate defects reported to Bentley TSG and detected during testing have been addressed and tested. A complete list is available from Bentley TSG.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Getting Started
Module Overview

In this module, you learn how to launch the Bentley Instrumentation &Wiring main interface and the Layout Designer module. You will be introduced to some of the basic features of each interface.

Module Prerequisites

• Working knowledge of the Instrumentation discipline.

Module Objectives


• Launch the Instrumentation & Wiring application.

• Log into a project.

• Find views and reports from the project window.

• Use the Layout Designer.

Feb-10 41 Getting Started


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Starting Instrumentation & Wiring

Starting Instrumentation & Wiring

Exercise 1: Launching Bentley Instrumentation & Wiring

1 Select Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Instrumentation.

2 The Login To Project dialog opens.

Note: If you previously logged into another Bentley application and set the Save Password check box, the Login dialog will not display. You can access this dialog by selecting File > Log on as a Different User.

Instrumentation & Wiring defaults to logging in with supervisor privileges by populating the User Name field with Supervisor.

3 Type Supervisor in the Password field.

4 Click OK.

Bentley Instrumentation & Wiring opens.

Getting Started 42 Feb-10Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

A TOUR OF THE MAIN INTERFACE


After initial startup, the Instrumentation & Wiring toolbars display docked in the upper portion of the screen. These toolbars provide the fastest access to application commands. To view the name of the command that will be executed by any toolbar button, simply position the cursor over an item and pause. A “tool tip” will display describing that item.

Menu Command Functions

File Menu

The File Menu command enable opening an existing project; editing and management of descriptive, database, directory, and path information associated with the current project; importing and exporting table data; associating project standards with loops; assigning revision marks to project tag numbers; and printing project documents.

File Menu: Description:

Open Project Displays the Open Project Dialog which enables you to locate and open an existing project. This button is the equivalent of the File > Open Project menu command.

Log on as a Different User… Launches the Login dialog to allow a different login to be used.

Import Launches the Import dialog to allow data to be imported from an external file to the current project.

Export Launches an Export dialog to allow data to be exported to an external file from the current project.

Feb-10 43 Getting StartedCopyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Edit Menu

The Edit menu allows short cut methods to traditionally time consuming keyboard actions.

.

Assign Project Standards Launches the Assign Project Standards dialog which allows loops in the current project or imported from an external data file that have not been an a project standards to be assigned one..

Batch Revisions Launches the Batch Revisions dialog which allows the creation of a selection set of tags to be revised at one time.

Batch Print Launches the Batch Print dialog which allows multiple documents to be printed at one time.

Exit Closes the Instrumentation & Wiring Interface.

Edit Menu: Description:

Select All Selects all information contained in the current cell.

Cut Cuts all information contained in the current cell.

Copy Copies all information contained in the current cell.

Paste Pastes copied or cut information into the current cell.

Clear Erases all information contained in the current cell.

File Menu: Description:


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Project Toolbar

The following provides a quick reference to the icon available in the Project toolbar.

View Toolbar And Menu

The View Menu and Toolbar provide commands to toggle the Project Window, Documents Window, and Properties Window; refresh the current view, and to customize the display of the current view. One-step menu commands are also provided to display the current project instrument list, instrumentation cables, motor list, and electrical cables.

Toolbar Icon: Description:

Open Project Displays the Open Project dialog which enables you to locate and open an existing project. This button is the equivalent of the File > Open Project menu command.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The following provides a quick reference to the icons available in the View toolbar.


Instrument List Displays the Instrument List view which shows all of the instruments defined in the current project. From this view you can create new loops, edit existing loops, or edit individual instruments on a field-by-field basis. The instrumentation data displayed in this view can be controlled by user-defined filters and sorting. In addition, instrumentdata can be modified using a powerful search and replace engine.This button is the equivalent of the View > Instrument List menu command.

Instrument Cables Displays the Cable Schedule Instrumentation view which enables you to quickly display and edit all instrument cable data used in the current project. This button is the equivalent of the View > Instrumentation Cables menu command.

Motor List Displays the Motor List view, which shows the database details for all motors defined in the current project. From this view you can create new motors or edit existing motor details. The data displayed in this view can be controlled by user-defined filters and sorting. This button is the equivalent of the View > Motor List menu command.

Electrical Cables Displays the Cable Schedule Electrical view which enables you to quickly display and edit all cable data used in the current project.This button is the equivalent of the View > Electrical Cables menu command.

Refresh Immediately updates displayed information with current data. This button is the equivalent of the View > Refresh menu command.

Project Window Toggles the Project Window which enables you to open, create, or modify database views, queries, reports, Instrument templates, electrical templates, macros, and tables. This button is the equivalent of the View > Project Window menu command.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Tools Toolbar And Menu

The Tools Menu provides commands to quickly create, edit and delete tag numbers; search/replace a tag or text string, and to filter and sort the data in the current view. Database utilities and tools to set the default view and report are also provided within the Tools Menu.

The following provides a quick reference to the icons available in the Tools toolbar.

Documents Window Toggles the Documents dialog which enables you to view, edit, preview, and print documents associated with the tag numberselected in the current view. This button is the equivalent of the View > Documents Window menu command.

Properties Window Toggles the Property Sheet dialog which enables you to view and edit database information specific to the current tag such as tag number, loop number, service, description, manufacturer, and model.This button is the equivalent of the View > Properties Window menu command.


New Tag Depending on the active view, the New Tag icon enables you to create a new tag in the current view, instrument loop, field panel, motor, or piece of equipment. Many of these tags are built utilizing a wizard interface.

Edit Tag Depending on the active view, the Edit Tag icon enables you to edit an existing tag number within the current view.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Delete Tag Depending on the active view, the Delete Tag icon enables you to remove the current tag number from the current view.

Find Displays the Find Tag dialog which enables you to search for a specific tag number contained in the current view. Controls are provided to search for a tag number containing a specific text string.

Filter Provides commands to quickly filter the data in the current view.

Sort Provides commands to quickly sort the data in the current view.

Replace Provides a tool to quickly search for and replace specific text and expressions within the current view.

Associate Provides a tool to select loop, panel or segment to associate with the instrument.

Database Tools Launches the Database Tools dialog to enable maintenance of the current project database.

Connection/AllocationRestrictions

Launches the Assign Component Connection/Allocation Restrictiondialog to enable the definition of component connection/allocation restrictions for the current project.

Bulk Generate Documents Launches the Bulk Generate Documents dialog to allow the generation of all documents not previously generated.

Options Launches the Options dialog to set default general or startup optionsand drawing generation options for the current project



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Applications Toolbar And Menu

The Applications Menu provides commands to launch other products such as Layout Designer, Datasheets, Specification Sheets, Hookups, Single-Line Editor and Symbol Editor.

The following provides a quick reference to the icons available in the Applications toolbar.


Layout Designer Launches the Layout Designer module which enables you to define loop components, connect loop components and generate documents pertaining to specific loops.

Data Sheet Editor Launches the Datasheets module which allows you to access and managerdynamically-passed process and instrumentation data such as tag numbers, process data, vendor data, etc.

Specification Sheet Editor Launches the Specification Sheet Editor module which allows you to access and manager dynamically-passed process and instrumentation data such as tag numbers, process data, vendor data, etc.

Hookup Editor Launches the Hookups module which allows you to manager instrument installation detail drawings and to generate parts lists and a Bill of Materials.

Single Line Editor Launches the Single Line Editor module which allows you to modify theproperties defined for Single Line diagrams.

Cable Routing Launches the Cable Routing dialog which enables you to route cables to individual trays.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The View Pane

The View Pane is found along the right side of the main Instrumentation & Wiring interface. This area displays the data contained within defined views and reports. Column order can be arranged to user preferences by using drag and drop functions on the column headers. Columns can be resized by dragging the individual column borders to a suitable length. The individual views within the View Pane can be resized by using the Maximize and Restore Up/Down buttons, or by scaling the view using standard Windows operations.

Tray Routes Launches the Tray Routes dialog which allows you to create and edit tray routes.

Symbol Editor Launches the Symbol Editor module which allows you to define the symbols to be used in the Single Line Editor.

IWD Editor Launches the IWD Editor modules which enables you to create borders for both the Detail Connection Window and the Layout Designer.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The Project Window

The Project Window is toggled on by default and is displayed in left-hand pane of the Instrumentation & Wiring interface. The Project Window enables you to open, create, or modify database views, system queries, reports, drawing templates, macros, and tables in the current project.

Note: The controls within the Project Window will change in accordance with the node selected.

The following provides a quick reference to the nodes available in the Project Window.

Node: Description:

Views The Views node enables viewing, creating, editing, and deleting views defined in the current project standards.

System Queries The System Queries node enables viewing and editing pre-defined queries which can be applied to the current project database.

Reports The Reports node enables previewing, creating, editing, deleting, and revising reports defined in the current project standards.

Instrument Templates The Instrument Templates node lists all of the available instrument templates, organized by type.

Electrical Templates The Electrical Templates lists all of the available electrical templates, organized by type.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 2: Find and View a Report

1 Expand the Reports node.

2 Select Instrument List.

3 Click the right mouse button to display the context menu.

Hint: You can also preview reports by clicking Preview Report within the Project Window toolbar or by double clicking on the report list.

Macros The Macros node enables running, creating, editing, and deleting macros defined in the current project standards.

Tables The Tables node enables opening and editing data in an existing table within the current project.

Node: Description:


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


4 Select Preview.

Note: When the report opens, it must open the database; therefore, a message dialog will display temporarily to monitor the progress.

5 Click anywhere on the report.

View will automatically zoom in, or use the scroll bar to navigate through the report.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Layout Designer

Layout Designer

In this section you will become familiar with the Layout Designer module of Instrumentation & Wiring. The Layout Designer enables you to define loop components, connect loop components, and generate documents pertaining to specific loops. Components on a layout have right-click context menus to reduce the amount of time needed to perform detailed connections, tag modifications, or component definition.

Exercise 1: Layout Designer Interface

1 Select Applications > Layout Designer.

To launch the Layout Designer module.

2 Click No.

To display new layout wizard.

3 Type Test in the Description field of the New Layout Wizard.

4 Click Finish.

To create the new layout.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Layout Designer

5 The new Test layout opens.

Note: Layouts can be named anything, but it is recommended that the name describe the contents of the layout. For example, Analog loops 10-JBA-100 would include all analog loops for the junction box 10-JBA-100. Any component can be placed on any number of layouts. For instance, 10-JBA-100 can be added to multiple layouts if needed to allow all field devices to be terminated.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Layout Designer

A Tour Of Layout Designer

The toolbars shown below provide the fastest access to application commands. To view the name of the command that will be executed by any toolbar button, simply position the cursor over an item and pause. A “tool tip” will display describing that item.

Layout Designer Toolbar

The following provides a quick reference to the icons available in the Layout Designer toolbar.

Component Bar Toggles the Component Bar which enables you to view and define components (i.e., loops, instruments, panels, motors, etc), create and define new components, and drag these defined components onto a layout for connection. This button is the equivalent to the View > Component Bar menu command..

Documents Window Toggles the Documents dialog which enables you to view, edit, preview, and print documents associated with the tag number selected in the current layout. This button is the equivalent of the View > Documents Window menu command.

Terminal Strips Window Toggles the Tstrips dialog which enables you to view the terminal strip defined for a selected object in the current layout. You can also create and design new terminal strips or redefine existing terminal strips from this dialog. This button is the equivalent of the View > Tstrips Window menu command.

Show Detail Connections Window Toggles the Detailed Connection Window. This multipurpose window enables you to display a detailed view of the connections defined for a specific loop. This dialog also includes several edit functions to enable you to redefine terminal numbers and cable cores. You can also adjust the connection position of any of the columns included on the document, allowing them to line up like terminal strips on the LOOPCON.XLS and LOOPCON.DWG documents. You can also export the Detailed Connection tokens to a.dwg in order to reduce the amount of time to create a template from this dialog.. This button is the equivalent of the View > Detail Connection Window menu command..


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Layout Designer

Change to Layout Designer Switches the View Pane to the layout in the Layout list..

Create New Layout Displays the New Layout Wizard dialog, which provides a step-by-step process for building new layouts..This button is the equivalent of the Layout > New Layout menu command.

Edit Layout Description Displays the Edit Layout Description dialog which enables you to redefine the name of the current layout. This button is the equivalent of the Layout > Edit Layout Description menu command.

Delete Selected Layout Deletes the current layout selected in the Layout pick list..This button is the equivalent of the Layout > Delete Layout menu command.

Save Image of Layout Displays the Save As dialog which enables you to save the current Layout Drawing to as an external file. This button is the equivalent of the Actions > Save As menu command.

Find Layouts for Selected Object Displays the Select Layout dialog which enables you to select an existing layout to display in the View Pane. This button is the equivalent of the Layout > Find Layout for Component menu command.

Refresh Layout Immediately updates the active layout with current data. This button is the equivalent of the View > Refresh menu command.

Print Prints the active layout to the default Windows printer. This button is the equivalent of the Actions > Print menu command.

Preview Displays a Print Preview of the active layout. This button is the equivalent of the Actions > Preview menu command.

Edit Displays the Edit dialog, which enables you to edit the properties associated with the component selected in the active layout. This button is the equivalent of the Tools > Edit Tag menu command.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Layout Designer

Connect Displays the Connect dialog, which enables you to create instrument-to-panel, panel-to-panel, and terminal strip-to terminal strip (internal panel) connections for the component selected in the active layout. This button is the equivalent of the Layout > Connect menu command.

Disconnect Disconnects the selected component in the active layout. This button is the equivalent of the Layout > Disconnect menu command.

Connect I/O Displays the Connect Instruments to Card I/O List in Panel dialog which enables you to allocate an Instrument to a specific address on a card in a card panel. This button is the equivalent of the Layout > Allocate I/O menu command.

Cut Cuts the selected component out of the active layout. This button is the equivalent of the Layout > Cut menu command.

Copy Copies the selected component in the active layout. This button is the equivalent of the Layout > Copy menu command.

Paste Pastes a copied component onto the selected layout. This button is the equivalent of the Layout > Paste menu command.

Assembly Options Launches the Select Assembly dialog as a means to create, delete or insert assemblies.

Zoom In Zooms in on the active layout. This button is the equivalent of the View > Zoom > In menu command.

Zoom Out Zooms out on the active layout. This button is the equivalent of the View > Zoom > Out menu command.

Align Left Aligns all selected components on the active layout to the left-most object. This button is the equivalent of the Tools > Align > Left menu command.

Align Right Aligns all selected components on the active layout to the right-most object. This button is the equivalent of the Tools > Align > Right menu command.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Layout Designer

The Component Bar

To allow you to define loop components, Layout Designer provides the Component Bar — a navigational tool that allows you to view existing components (i.e., loops, instruments, panels, motors, etc.), create and define new components, and drag these defined components onto a layout for connecting. The controls within the Component Bar change in accordance with the tab selected. The Component Bar is located on the left side of the Layout Designer below the icons.

Actions Toolbar

The Actions toolbar located within the individual tabs of the Component Bar provide controls specific to the active tab. The controls within these tabs will change in accordance with the active tab.

Align Top Aligns all selected components on the active layout to the top-most object. This button is the equivalent of the Tools > Align > Top menu command.

Align Bottom Aligns all selected components on the active layout to the bottom-most object. This button is the equivalent of the Tools > Align > Bottom menu command.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Layout Designer

Instrumentation Tab

Select the Instrumentation tab on the Component Bar. The Instrumentation Tab displays all components for defining instrumentation loops.

The following provides a quick reference to the icons available in the Instrumentation Tab toolbar.

Icon: Description:

Instrument Loops Switches the Instrumentation Tab to display the Instrument Loops list

Instruments Switches the Instrumentation Tab to display the Instrument list.

Instrument (Control) Cables Switches the Instrumentation Tab to display the Instrument or Control Cables list

Field Panels Switches the Instrumentation Tab to display the Field Panels list..

Card Panels Switches the Instrumentation Tab to display the Card Panels list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Layout Designer

Electrical Tab

Select the Electrical tab on the Component Bar. The Electrical Tab displays all components for defining electrical loops.

The following provides a quick reference to the icons available in the Electrical Tab toolbar.

Icon: Description:

Equipment Switches the Electrical Tab to display the Equipment list.

Motors Switches the Electrical Tab to display the Motors list.

Electrical Cables Switches the Electrical Tab to display the Electrical Cables list

Electrical Panels Switches the Electrical Tab to display the Electrical Panels list.

Electrical Panels (FIeldbus) Switches the Electrical Tab to display the Electrical FB Panels list.

Card Panel Switches the Electrical Tab to display the Card Panel list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Layout Designer

Fieldbus Tab

Select the Fieldbus tab on the Component Bar. The Fieldbus Tab displays all components for defining fieldbus loops.

The following provides a quick reference to the icons available in the Fieldbus Tab toolbar.

Icon: Description:

Fieldbus Segments Switches the Fieldbus Tab to display the Fieldbus Segments list

Fieldbus Instruments Switches the Fieldbus Tab to display the Fieldbus Instruments list.

Fieldbus Spurs/Cables Switches the Fieldbus Tab to display the Fieldbus Spurs/Cables list.

Fieldbus Panels Switches the Fieldbus Tab to display the Fieldbus Panels list

Card Panels Card PanelsSwitches the Fieldbus Tab to display the Card Panels list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Layout Designer

The View Pane

The View Pane is located on the right side of Layout Designer. The View Pane displays a graphical representation of individual components and their connectivity.

1 Select Actions > Exit.

To return to the main Instrumentation & Wiring interface.

2 Select File > Exit.

To close Bentley Instrumentation & Wiring.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review

Now that you have completed this module, let’s review what you have learned.

Questions:

1 Where is the component bar located?

2 Can the Datasheet application be launched from the Layout Designer?

3 Which application would you use to run a Card Panel report?

Answers:

1 The component bar is located in the Layout Designer.

2 No, the Datasheet application must be launched from the main Instrumentation & Wiring interface.

3 The main Instrumentation & Wiring application would be used to run a Card Panel report.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Building Loop Components
Module Overview

In this module you will build an instrument, create a new terminal strip and cable for the instrument. You will make a standard for this loop and then build a second instrument from the standard.


• Working knowledge of Instrumentation.

• Six months experience with AutoCAD or Microstation.

Module Objectives


• Create a new instrument.

• Create a new instrument terminal strip.

• Create a new instrument cable.

• Add an instrument to an existing loop.

• Modify the lists within the loop dialog.

• Create a loop project standard.

• Create an instrument loop from standards

• Build a loop created in Data Manager

Feb-10 65 Building Loop Components


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



In this module, you learn how to build and modify instruments and other loop components using the main Instrumentation & Wiring interface. You also learn how to store these components as project standards, and create new loops from the project standards. You will also build a loop from a tag that was created outside of the I&W interface. In this section you learn to create an instrument loop, add an instrument to an existing loop, and create a new terminal strip and cable for this instrument.

For each component built in the Instrumentation & Wiring application, there are parameters which define the components. The most important parameter is the tag type. The tag type defines what type of component is being built. There are many types of instruments. For example, transmitters, control valves, flow elements, etc. A transmitter uses the tag type AT_INST_, whereas a control valve uses AT_CVALVE. There are also many types of terminal strips. An instrument terminal strip uses the tag type AT_TSTRIP, but a landing terminal strip uses AT_LAND_TSTRIP. These distinctions allow the software to store the data for each component in the proper database tables.

Another parameter is the tag code. The tag code defines the formatting of the tag number. The tag code provides the ability to modify the tags to fit your company’s tagging formats. The tag code also tells the software how to parse the tag information into different fields within the project database tables. Tag types can be set to be unique or not unique. A unique tag type always informs you that the tag already exists if you try to use an existing tag number. As with tag numbers, terminal strips can also be set for uniqueness. By default, tag codes are set to be unique, but depending on your needs they can be changed. If your field panels contain terminal strips tagged TS-1, then you will need to set the tag code to not be unique. For the designer/drafter, these codes will be pre-set by the project administrator during the creation of the project, but in this training manual, you will modify some tag codes to meet the needs of the exercises.

Building Loop Components 66 Feb-10Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 1: Creating an Instrument Loop

1 Select Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Instrumentation.

2 Select Tools > New Tag.

3 Set From Scratch radio button.

Note: The New Instrument Loop dialog presents four options — three for creating a new instrument loop and one for creating a new instrument tag.

Feb-10 67 Building Loop ComponentsCopyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


4 Click Next >.

Note: The tag types and tag codes that were discussed earlier are an integral part of the creation of the instrument loop and the individual instruments.

5 Type Refined Oil to Heat Exchanger in the Service Description field.

Note: The Overwrite Instr Service with Loop Service check box aids in consistency among all components of the instrument loop.

6 Click Next >.

Note: Make sure that the Also Create Instrument Tstrip and Also Create Instrument Cable are checked. If you fail to check these you will have to create them manually. Additionally if you allow them to be created automatically, then they will be terminated automatically to the instruments.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


7 Click Next >.

8 Type 200-F-300 in the New Instrument Loop – Step 3 field.

9 Click OK.

10 Click Finish.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The New Loop dialog shows that a loop, instrument, terminal strip, cable, and document have been created (as shown in the All tab). Although these components have a tag number allocated in the database, the details for each have not been defined.

The All tab displays the contents of the loop, including the tag types for each component. The Loop, Instr, Tstrip, Cable, and Doc tabs display only components of that tag type. The properties for the selected components are listed in the window along the right-hand side of the dialog.

Notice the Auto Rename check boxes in the left-hand pane. If this loop is saved as a standard and used as a template in creating future loops, the components of the new loop will automatically inherit new tag numbers for the components that have the Auto Rename check box set. Additionally, if you change the name of the current loop within this dialog, then all components of the loop will be automatically renamed.

Hint: To place a check in the Auto Rename check box, you must select the item in the list and then click Setup. From the Tag Attributes dialog you and change the value for the check box.

Within the Standards group box there are two buttons, Build From and Save As. The Build From button is used to select a standard from which the current loop will be defined. The Save As button will save the current loop configuration as a standard to be used again.

Within the Tags group box there are five buttons, New, Edit, Delete, Remove and Setup. The New button will create a new tag within the loop, the Edit button will allow you to edit the tag, the Delete button will delete the selected tag, the Remove button will remove the tag from the loop without removing the data associated with the tag, and the Setup button will allow you to change the properties of the tag as shown below.

The Design button will allow a user to design the terminal strip or the cable for the loop and finally the Property View Options dialog will allow user to


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


change the fields listed in the properties window as shown below. Click Cancel to close the dialog.

11 Select the Instr tab.

12 Select 200-F-300.

13 Click Edit within the Tags group box.

14 Select FT from the Typ list.

15 Click OK.

The following dialog displays, prompting you to update the Tstrip and Cable tag numbers with the modified tag number.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


16 Click Yes.

To return to the New Loop dialog.

17 From the Instr Properties window, select the Manufacturer field.

18 Select ROSEMOUNT from the list.

19 Select the Model field.

20 Select D/P FLOW TRANSMITTER from the list.

21 Select the I/O field.

22 Select AI from the list.

To define this is an analog input instrument.

23 Type Flow Transmitter in the Description field.

24 Scroll down and type 4-20mA in the Range field.

25 Select the Tstrip tab.

Note: The tag number has been updated to reflect the change.

26 Select the Cable tab.

27 Add the following data to the Cable Properties window.

Note: The Loop tab and Doc tab will continue to show the original tag number.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 2: Create an Instrument Terminal Strip


2 Select 200-FT-300.

3 Click Design.

4 Click Add.

The Add Terminal Set dialog enables you to add new connection rows to the current Tstrip. The Terminal window allows you to define the number of individual terminals to be included in the new terminal set. The Repeat window allows you to type the number of repeated connection rows to be inserted into the current Tstrip in this field, or use the spinner button to select the appropriate value.

Note: A row refers to an individual terminal and a row set refers to a group of rows that are wired for one function. A powered instrument for example would have a row set of 3 rows for the powered cable and a row set of 3 rows for the instrument cable. The row set definitions are critical for building a loop in the Detail Connection Window and auto-generated loops.

To select from a list of pre-defined standard row sets, click Build From to display the Build From Standard Terminal Set dialog. To save the current row


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


set details as a standard which can be used as a template in building new row sets, click Save As to display the Save as Standard Terminal Set dialog. To copy the current row set terminal, click Copy. To clone the current row set terminals, click Clone. To remove a row set from the current Tstrip, place your cursor within the appropriate row, then click Delete. After you are finished defining the details of the new connection set, click OK to add the new terminals to the current Tstrip, or click Cancel to abort the new terminal set insertion process. The Links toolbar enables you to place graphical representations (no associated database information) of links, fuses, and linked terminals.

5 Type 3 in the Terminal field.

Hint: You can use the spinner button to raise the value to 3.

6 Ensure the Repeat field contains a value of 1.

7 Click Build From.

This dialog enables you to select predefined terminal combinations.

8 Select AI from the list near the top of the dialog.

To filter the selections to display only analog inputs.

9 Select +,- (with SCR Tied Back).

10 Click OK.

To return to the Add Terminal Set dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Note: The + and – have been added to the Term column. Also, notice the tie back symbol in row 3, column 3. This link indicates that the SCR has been tied back.

11 Click OK.

12 Click OK.

To return to the New Loop dialog.

Exercise 3: Creating the Instrument Cable


2 Select cable tag 200-FT-300.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


3 Click Design.

The New Cable dialog displays connection details of the cable, and provides tools for modifying connection numbering. To display the details of a cable, select the manufacturer of the cable from the Cable Manufacturer list, then select the cable type from the Cable Type list. To create a new core set, click Add to display the Add Core Set dialog. To edit the details of a core set, click Edit to display the Edit Core Set dialog. To insert a new core set, place your cursor where you want to insert the new core set, then click Insert to display the Insert Core Set dialog. To remove cable cores or a core set from the current cable, click Delete to display the Delete Core(s) dialog. To save the current cable details as a project standard, click Save As Standard to display the Save Cable Type As dialog.

4 Since no cable cores have been defined, click Add from the Core Set group box.

The Add Core Set dialog enables you to add new cable cores to the current cable. Use the Core spinner button to indicate the number of individual cores to be included in the new Core Set. In the Repeat window type the number of repeated cores to be inserted into the current cable in this field, or use the spinner button to select the appropriate value. To copy the current core set terminal, click Copy. To remove a core set from the current cable, place your cursor within the


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


appropriate row, then click Delete. After you are finished defining the details of the new core set, click OK to add the new cores to the current cable, or click Cancel to abort the new core set insertion process.

5 Change the value in the Core field to 3.


7 Type WH in the first row of the Core column.

8 Type BK in the second row.

9 Type S in the third row.

10 Click OK.

11 To return to the New Cable dialog.

12 Click OK.

13 To return to the New Loop dialog.

Exercise 4: Adding Instruments to the loop


2 Click New from the Tags group box.

3 Clear the Also Create Cable check box.

Note: In order for I&W to pull information from the database for a component when creating an output drawing or when looking at a loop in the


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Detail Connection Window, the component must have at lease one terminal block. For loop components that normally do not have a terminal block such as and FE, it must still have a blank terminal block.

4 Set the Also Create Instrument Tstrip.

5 Click OK.

To display the New INSTR dialog.

6 Select FE from the Typ list.

7 Click OK.

8 Click New.

To create another new tag.

9 Select AT_CVALVE from the Setup New Instrument Tag Types dialog.

10 Set Also Create Instrument Tstrip.


12 Click OK.

13 Select FV from the Typ list.

14 Click OK.

15 Select 200-FV-300 from the Instr tab.

16 Type <Unspecified> in the Manufacturer field.

17 Select BALL CONTROL VALVE from the Model list.


To display the Setup New Instrument Tag types dialog.

19 Select AT_INST_ from the Tag Type field.

20 Ensure the Also Create Instrument Tstrip and Also Create Cable check boxes are set.

This is because the transducer will be wired. Therefore; it will have to have a terminal strip and a cable.

21 Click OK.

22 To display the New INSTR dialog.

23 Type 200-FY-300 in the New INSTR field.

24 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


25 Modify the properties of 200-FY-300 as shown.

26 Using the Instrument Position buttons, rearrange the instruments into the following order; 200-FE-300, 200-FT-300, 200-FY-300, 200-FV-300.

27 Referring back to exercises 2 and 3, design the terminal strip and cable for 200-FY-300.

Exercise 5: Modifying the Lists within the Properties Window


2 Select 200-FE-300.

3 Select the Manufacturer field.

Notice that the only value available from the list is <Unspecified>.

Note: You have two choices at this point, you can type the information manually, or you can create a new record in the INS_TYPE table. In this exercise, you will create a new record.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


4 Click Browse (located to the right of the Manufacturer field).

5 Select ANNUBAR from the list.

6 Click Copy.

7 Type 50EZ-435 in the field provided.

8 Click OK.

To return to the Edit Model and Manufacturer Details dialog.

9 Type ANDERSON ELEMENTS in the MANUFACTR field.

10 Type FLOW ELEMENT in the DESCRIPT field.

11 Delete the text in the USER1 field.

12 Click OK.


14 Select 200-FE-300 from the Instr tab.

15 Select the Manufacturer field.

Notice that the list now contains the new value.

16 Select ANDERSON ELEMENTS from the Manufacturer list.

17 Select 50EZ- 435 from the Model list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Take some time to browse through the various tabs and note the information that has been added. When you are finished, click OK to save the new loop details and return to the main Instrumentation & Wiring interface.

Hint: Should you need to delete any cables and re-create them, or create a new cable from scratch, ensure that the cable has a source (as indicated within the Properties window). If a cable is created without a source, it will not be saved with the loop.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Create a Loop Standard


To save the loop you created in the previous exercise as a template (project standard) for building future loops.

Exercise 1: Create a Loop Standard

1 Select any of the components from the Instrument List displayed in the View Pane.

2 Select Tools > Edit Tag.


4 Set the Auto Rename check box for all components.

5 Repeat the previous step with the components in the Tstrip, Cable and Doc tabs.

6 Select the All tab.

All components now have the Auto Rename field set except for the AT_LOOP.

7 From the Standards group box, click Save As.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Note: Bentley Instrumentation & Wiring assists you in naming the loop standard by populating the Loop field with the current loop components, and the associated template.

8 Type FE,FT,FY,FV: Training Loopcon.dwg in the Loop field.

9 Click OK.

To return to the Edit Loop dialog.

10 Click OK.

To return to the main Instrumentation & Wiring interface.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Create a Loop from Standards


Exercise 1: Create an Instrument Loop from Standards

1 Select Tools > New Tag to display the New Instrument Loop – Step 1 dialog.

2 Set the From Standards radio button, and then click Next >.

Note: This dialog displays the standards that have been saved in the current project. You have the option of using the Select From button to select From Bentley standards, or standards built in another project. The View Details button displays a preview of the wiring details (i.e., number of row sets, terminal designations, cores, etc.) for the loop selected.

3 Select FE,FT,FY,FV: Training Loopcon.dwg, then click Next >.

To display the Loop Tag dialog.

4 Type 200-P-300 in the Loop Tag field.

5 Click OK.

To display the New Instrument Loop – Step 3 dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


6 Click Finish.

The New Loop dialog displays all of the tags converted from F (Flow) to P (Pressure). The Built From field displays the standard from which the new loop was built.

Exercise 2: Modifying the Loop

1 Select the ALL tab and then select 200-P-300.

2 Type Heated Water Pressure from Exchanger EX-300 in the Service Description field.


4 Select 200-PE-300 from the list.

5 Click Edit in the Tags group box.

To display the Edit INSTR dialog.

6 Select PAL from the Typ list.

7 Click OK.


9 Select DI from the I/O Type list.

10 Type Alarm Low in the Description field.

11 Delete the information in the Manufacturer and Model fields.

12 Select 200-PT-300 from the Instr tab list.

13 Delete any information contained in the Manufacturer, Model, and Description fields.

14 Select 200-PY-300 from the Instr tab list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


15 Delete any information contained in the Manufacturer, Model, and Description fields.

16 Select 200-PV-300 from the Instr tab list.

17 Delete any information contained within the Manufacturer and Model fields.

18 Clicking New within the Tags group box.

To display the Setup New Instrument Tag Types dialog.

19 Click OK.


21 Click OK.

To display the New INSTR dialog.

22 Type 200-PAH-300 in the New INSTR field.

23 Click OK.

To add the new instrument to the loop.

24 Select 200-PAH-300 from the Instr tab.

25 Select DI from the I/O Type list.

26 Type Alarm High in the Description field.

27 Delete the information in the Manufacturer and Model fields.


29 Select 200-PT-300.

30 Click Design.

Notice that the new terminal strip has been created.

31 Click Cancel.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


33 Select 200-PT-300.

34 Click Design.

Notice that the new cable has also been created.

35 Click Cancel to exit the dialog.

The loop 200-P-300 is now complete.

36 Click OK.

To save the modifications and return to the main Instrumentation & Wiring interface.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Create New Loop from Instrument created in Data Manager


One of the major benefits to the Bentley PLANT suite is the ability to share data across the applications. The tag 100-FT-300 was previously created and is available for use in the Instrumentation & Wiring application. Tags created outside of I&W are stand-alone tags and are not part of an instrument loop. I&W gives you the capability to generate loops for these tags so that loop diagrams can be generated.

Exercise 1: Create a New Loop from an instrument tag created in Data Manager

1 Select 100-LT-200 from the Instrumentation list.

2 Right-click and select Edit Tag.

The following dialog opens indicating that the instrument tag does not belong to a loop.

Note: Selecting any instrument from the list that has not been assigned to a loop number will list all instruments without loop number in the Allocate Missing Loops dialog. This enables you to create loop numbers for these instruments automatically by clicking Generate Loop Numbers.

3 Click Generate Loop Numbers

To assign the tag to a loop.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Hint: If the instrument should belong to a different loop number other than the one automatically created, then you can manually enter the loop number for this instrument. The loop number can be either one that does not exist or does exist in I&W. As an example, if you had a hand switch for this loop named 200-HS-312 then this could belong to loop 200-F-312. If the loop number were automatically created for this hand switch, then it would be created as 200-H-312.

Note that a loop number has now populated the LOOP_NO field.

4 Click OK.

To return to the Instrumentation & Wiring main interface.

The instrument list shows the newly created loop number.

5 Highlight 100-TT-100.

6 Select Edit Tag.

7 Click Build From in the Standards group box.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


8 Click Select From.

The Select From dialog opens.

9 Set System Library.

10 Click OK.

The following dialog opens showing all loop standards that are supplied by Bentley instrumentation & Wiring.

11 Select TE,TT,TY,TV.

12 Click OK.

13 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Note that a terminal strip and cable have been added to the loop. Browse the Tstrip and Cable tabs and notice that the new components have been named appropriately.

The Tag Number 100-TE-100 shown in red indicates that there is a discrepancy in the tag types for this tag number between the standard and the existing tag.

14 Select the text in red (Tag Type AT_INST_) for tag 100-FE-300.

15 Click Delete.

16 Click Yes.

To confirm the deletion.

17 Click OK.

To close the dialog and save the loop.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review


Questions:

1 To build a loop from a standard, what is the option to select on the first New Loop Wizard dialog?

2 What does the Generate Loop Numbers button do?

3 What are the two options available when a Manufacturer or Model is not found in the provided list?

4 What does the Repeat field do in the Add TSTRIP and Add CABLE set dialogs?

5 What is a row? Row set?

Answers:

1 Set the From Standards radio button to create a loop from standards.

2 The Generate Loop Numbers button will create a new instrument loop for an instrument tag that was created in a separate application.

3 One option is to type the information into the field manually, the second option is to add the information to the INS_TYPE by copying an existing record and updating as needed.

4 The repeat will create multiple sets of the TSTRIP and CABLE configurations and automatically number them.

5 A row is an individual terminal point and a row set is a grouping of terminal points.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Building Field and Card Panels
Module Overview

In this module you learn how to build and modify field panels using the Bentley Instrumentation & Wiring interface. You also learn how to store these components as project standards, which can be used as templates in building future field panels.




Module Objectives


• Create a field panel.

• Design terminal strips in the field panel.

• Design multi-core cables for the field panel.

• Create a field panel standard.

• Create a new field panel from standards.

• Create a card panel.

• Create a landing strip in the card panel.

• Design the I/O card.

• Add a new I/O card to the existing panel.

Feb-10 93 Building Field and Card Panels


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



Building a Field Panel

In this section you learn to create a new field panel. You also learn to design the terminal strips within the panel and design the multi-core cables that connect them.

Exercise 1: Creating a new Field Panel

1 Select Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Instrumentation from your Windows Start menu to launch Instrumentation & Wiring if not already open.

2 Launch Layout Designer.

3 Type Analog Loops in the Description field.

4 Click Finish.

5 Select the Instrumentation tab.

6 Select Field Panels.

7 Select New Tag.

The field panel tag has been added to the view.

8 Set From Scratch.

Building Field and Card Panels 94 Feb-10Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


9 Click Next >.

10 Type Area 200 Analog Junction Box in the Field Panel Remarks field.

11 Click Next >.

To accept the defaults for Tag Types and Tag Codes and to display the following dialog.

12 Select T-N from the Tag Code list.

13 Click Next >.

14 Type 200-JB-300 in the New Field Panel – Step 3 field.

Feb-10 95 Building Field and Card PanelsCopyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


15 Click OK.

16 Click Finish.

The New Field Panel dialog is very similar to the New Loop dialog except for the tabs. All of the buttons along the bottom of the dialog operate just as in the New Loop dialog detailed in the previous module. The Dev tab is used in the Field Panel and Card Panel dialogs for devices such as relays and intrinsic barriers to be tagged and designed.

The New Field Panel dialog defaults to display the All tab, which shows that a tag was created for the junction box, terminal strip, cable and document.


18 Select JB-300.

19 Click Edit in the Tags group box.

20 Type TS in the Typ field.

21 Type 1 in the Num field.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


22 Click OK.

To return to the New Field Panel dialog.

Exercise 2: Design Terminal Strips In A Field Panel

1 Click Design.

To display the Edit TSTRIP dialog.

2 Click Add.

To display the Add Terminal Set dialog.

3 Set the Terminal field to 3.

4 Set the Repeat field to 12.

This will create 12 sets of 3 terminals (i.e., a terminal strip with 36 terminals).

5 Click Build From.

6 To display the Build From Standard Terminal Set dialog.

7 Select A* from the list near the top of the dialog.

8 Select 1+, 1-, SCR.

9 Click OK.

Note: This dialog is the same dialog that is used when creating terminals for an instrument.

10 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


To generate the new terminal strip.

Notice the terminals are now numbered by terminal sets and rows. Another terminal must be created for the overall screen that contains multi-core cables.

11 Scroll to the bottom of the terminal strip to locate TSet 12. Select TSet 12.

12 Click Add from the Terminal Set group box.




15 Type OAS in the Term field.

16 Click OK.

17 To return to the Edit TSTRIP dialog.

18 Click OK.

19 To save the terminal settings and return to the New Field Panel dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 3: Design A Multi-Core Cable


Note: Within the Cable tab, notice that the Source field (within the Cable Properties window) is marked as a junction box. Unlike instruments, where the cable’s source is the instrument terminal strip, the source for a panel cable is the panel itself. In this case, do not change the Source field so that the cable will match the terminal strip.

2 Click Design.

3 Click Add from the Core Set group box.

4 To display the Add Core Set dialog.

5 Set the Core field to 3.


7 Type 1 WH for the first core in the Core field.

8 Type 1 BK for the second core.

9 Type 1 S for the third core.

10 Click OK.

11 Scroll down and select Core Set 12.

12 Click Add from the Core Set group-box.



15 Type OAS in the Core field.

16 Click OK.

To return to the New Cable dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Field Panel Standard

17 Click OK.


18 Click OK.

To return to Layout Designer.

Creating a Field Panel Standard

In this section, you learn how to make a standard of the field panel you just created. This standard can be used to generate multiple field panels.

Exercise 1: Create A Field Panel Standard

1 Select Tools > Edit Tag.

To display the Edit Field Panel dialog.


3 Set the Auto Rename check box.

4 Repeat for the Cable and Doc tabs.


6 Click Save As in the Standards group box.

To display the Store as Project Standard dialog.

7 Typing the following description in the Field Panel field.

8 Click OK.

To return to the Edit Field Panel dialog.

9 Click OK.

To return to Layout Designer.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Field Panel from Standards


In this section you learn to create a new field panel from the project standard that was built in the previous lesson.

Exercise 1: Create a Field Panel from Standards


To display the New Field Panel – Step 1 dialog.

2 Set From Standards.

3 Click Next >.

4 Select Analog_JB_ Training.

5 Click Next >.

To display the Panel Tag dialog.

6 Type 200-JB-301 in the Panel Tag field

7 Click OK.

To display the New Field Panel – Step 3 dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


8 Click Finish.

Note: All of the component tags have been updated to 200-JB-301.

9 Click Design.

10 To display the New Cable dialog. Notice how all of the cable core details have been created.

11 Click OK.

12 To return to the New Field Panel dialog.


14 Click New.

15 Type TS-2 in the New Tstrip field.

16 Click Design.

17 Click Add from the Terminal Set group box.




20 Type 1 in the Term field.

21 Click OK.

22 Click OK again.


24 Select cable TS-2-.

25 Edit the cable tag and change tag code to T-N.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


26 Rename cable to TS-2.

27 Design a cable with 1 core and a repeat of 12.

28 Click OK.

To save the new junction box and return to Layout Designer.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating New Card Panels


In this section you learn to create a card panel from scratch.

Exercise 1: Create a New Card Panel

In this exercise, you create a new card panel for a DCS. Card panels contain multiple components like landing terminal strips, power supplies, card racks, and the cards themselves. The landing strip is a gathering point for all incoming multi-core cables from the field. The landing strips are wired to the individual card terminal strips located on the back of the card using a vendor supplied cable. Therefore the individual cores must be terminated by I/O type. An example of a card panel is shown below.

1 Select Card Panels.


3 Set From Scratch.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


4 Click Next >.

5 Type Area 200 DCS Panel in the Card Panel Remarks field.

6 Click Next >.

7 Click Next >.

8 Type 200 in the Area field.

9 Type DCS300 in the Panelnum field.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


10 Click OK.

A tag number for one I/O card within this panel must be defined.

11 Type DCS300 in the Panelnum field.

12 Select AI from the IO_type list.

13 Type 01 in the Rack field.

14 Type 01 in the Num field.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


15 Click OK.

16 Click Finish.

No cable tag was created. This is because the wiring in this card panel will be done internally using a vendor supplied cable.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Adding a Landing Strip for Incoming Wiring


In this section, you learn how to add a landing strip to the card panel. Landing strips are used to terminate incoming multi-core cables. You will finish the I/O card design and add a new I/O card to the existing card panel.

Exercise 1: Create The Card Landing Terminal Strip And Card I/O Channels


2 Click New in the Tags group box.

3 To display the Setup New Tstrip Tag Types dialog.

4 Select AT_LAND_TSTRIP from the Tstrip Tag Types list.

5 Select N from the Tstrip Tag Codes list.

6 Verify that the Also Create Cable checkbox is cleared.

The wiring is internal to the DCS panel.

7 Click OK.

8 To display the New TSTRIP dialog.

9 Type TB1 in the New TSTRIP field.

10 Click OK.

To return to the New Card Panel dialog.

11 Select TB1.

12 Click Design.


13 Click Add in the Terminal Set group box.


15 Type 50 in the Repeat field.

16 Type 1 in the Term column for Row 1.

17 Type 2 in the Term column for Row 2.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


18 Type SCR in the Term column for Row 3.

19 Place a link line in column 4 of TSet 1 Row 1.

20 Place a link line in column 4 of TSet 1 Row 2.

21 Place a link in column 4 of TSet 1 Row 3.

22 Click OK.

Landing strip TB1 should now appear.

23 Place cursor in column 4 of TSet 1 Row1 and click Delete Link.

24 Scroll down to TSet 50 and click Add.


26 Place an uplink in column 4.

27 Click Ok.

28 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 2: Complete The I/O Card Design

1 From the Tstrip tab.

2 Select DCS300/AI-01-01 (AT_CRD_TSTRIP).

3 Click Design.






7 Type 1++ in the Term column for Row 1.

8 Type 1+ in the Term column for Row2.

9 Click OK.

10 Click OK.

To the New Card Panel dialog.

11 Select the Card tab.

12 Click Design.

The Edit I/O List dialog enables you to edit the current Card Panel I/O List. To change the I/O type for a specific row set, place your cursor in the appropriate row, then select the I/O type from the list located near the top of the dialog. To change any of the values within the individual fields, simply type over any of the information. To add a new I/O, click Add to


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


add the row to the bottom of the list. To remove a row set, place your cursor within the row you want to remove, then click Delete.

Note: Users can create I/O cards with mixed I/O. For example, 4 AI channels and 4 AO channels. Previously all the channels had to be the same I/O type.

13 Click Configure.

To display the Configure Card Fields dialog.

Note: This enables you to customize the fields displayed in this dialog.

14 Click OK.

To exit the dialog and save your changes, or click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.

15 Type 8 in the Spinner field.

16 Make sure the list is set to AI.

17 Click Add.

To create the default channel numbers and addresses.

18 Click OK.

19 To save the changes to the Edit I/O List dialog and return to the New Card Panel dialog.

Exercise 3: Add a New AO Card to the DCS Panel

1 Click New in the Tags group box.

To display the Setup New Card Tag Types dialog.

2 Click OK .

To display the New Card dialog.

3 Type DCS300/AO-02-01 in the New CARD field.

4 Click OK.

5 Select DCS300/AO-02-01 from the Card tab.

6 Click Design.

7 Select AO from the list near the top of the dialog.


9 Click Add.

To create the default channels and addresses.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


10 Click OK.


12 Select DCS300/AO-02-01 from the list of terminal strips.

13 Click Design.





17 Type 1- in the Term column for row 1.

18 Type 1C in the Term column for row 2.

19 Click OK.

To create the terminal strip and return to the Edit TSTRIP dialog.

20 Click OK.

To exit the Edit TSTRIP dialog and return to the New Card Panel dialog.


22 Select DCS300/AI-01-01.

23 Select ALLENBRADLEY 1771-IE-4W(AI) 24Vdc 8ch Analog Input from the Card Type list inthe Card Properties window,

24 Select DCS300/AO-02-01.

25 Select ALLEN BRADLEY 1771-IE-4W(AO) 24Vdc 8ch Analog Output from the Card Type list.

26 Click OK.

To save the New Card Panel and return to Layout Designer.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review


Questions:

1 What is the purpose of the link symbols?

2 True or False: The landing terminal strip is used to wire the I/O cards together?

3 In a field panel, what is the source for the panel cable?

4 If an I/O card is not available in the I/O card list of the properties window can you add one?

Answers:

1 The link symbols indicate jumpers that would be made in a panel.

2 False, the landing strip is used to marshal the incoming signal wiring to the I/O cards.

3 The source for the panel cable is the panel.

4 Yes, the I&W application is versatile enough to allow users to customize the I/O card list as needed.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Data Manipulation
Module Overview

In this module you will learn to manipulate the data by using the Sort, Filter, Find, and Replace commands. These tools will help you to navigate through the views. You will add data via the views, and then review the different nodes within the Instrumentation & Wiring interface.




Module Objectives


• Manipulate data in the project views.

Feb-10 115 Data Manipulation


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Data Manipulation

Data Manipulation

Select Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Instrumentation from your Windows Start menu to launch Instrumentation & Wiring if not already open.

Instrumentation & Wiring provides several views for looking at your data. These views provide a snapshot of the data contained in the project database. In the project provided, several loops, field panels and card panels have been created. Terminal strips and cables were created for each component.

Let’s take a moment to examine some of the views. Double-click on the Cable Schedule Instrumentation view. This view shows all of the instrument cables that have been created and provides the source (primary connection component). It also provides the cable type and length of cable required for the cable tray runs. A report generated from this view would be helpful to someone cataloging and ordering instrument cable. Close this view and open the Connection by Cable view. This view goes into more detail than the Cable Schedule view. It provides the terminal strips that the cable is attached to, the terminal on the strip that it is terminated on. A report built from this view would be helpful to a maintenance crew for tracing wiring problems. The Core Connection view expands the data a bit further by providing the cable tag information and the wire color. This view is sorted by the ORD number, but could be easily sorted by terminal strip or termination point by using the built in tools described below.

Tools for the Views

Exercise 1: Sort Data In The Project Views

1 Maximize Instrumentation & Wiring main interface.

2 Close all of the views.

3 Open the Instrument List view if not already open.

Data Manipulation 116 Feb-10Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Data Manipulation

4 Right-click on 200-FT-300 within the Instrument List.

5 Select Sort > Sort Descending.

The tags in the Instrument List are now sorted in descending order based on their tag number.

6 Right-click on 200-FT-300.

7 Select Sort > Clear Sort.

Exercise 2: Filter Data In The Project Views

1 Select 200-PAL-300.

2 Click in the I/O TYPE field.

3 Right-click.

To display the context menu.

Feb-10 117 Data ManipulationCopyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Data Manipulation

4 Select Filter > Quick Filter.

Notice that only tags matching the value within the selected I/O TYPE field (DI) display.

5 Right-click and select Filter > Clear Filter.

To view all of the tags again.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Data Manipulation

Exercise 3: Find Specific Tags

1 Right-click anywhere within the Instrument List view.

2 Select Find > Find Tag from the context menu.

The Find Tag dialog displays listing all the instrument tags in this project.

3 Type 200-PY-300 in the Tag Numbers that Contain field.

Notice how the list of tags reduces as you type. The list of tag numbers are dynamically filtered to match the value entered in this field.

4 Select 200-PY-300 from the list.

5 Click OK.

To locate that tag in the Instrument List. Notice that 200-PY-300 is now selected in the Instrument List.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Data Manipulation

Exercise 4: Replace Data

1 Locate tags 200-PAL-300 and 200-PAH-300.

Notice that they have similar descriptions of Alarm High and Alarm Low.

2 Place your cursor in any of the DESCRIPTION fields except for 200-PAL-300 or 200-PAH-300.

3 Right-click.

To display the context menu.

4 Select Replace.

5 To display the Replace in field ‘DESCRIPTION’ dialog.

6 Type Alarm in the Find What field.

7 Type Pressure Alarm in the Replace With field.

8 Clear the Match Whole Field and Current Field Only check boxes.

9 Click Replace All.

Notice tags 200-PAL-300 and 200-PAH-300 now have the description of Pressure Alarm Low and Pressure Alarm High.

Exercise 5: Replacing Data For Multiple Records

1 Select 200-PAL-300 and 200-PAH-300 using the SHIFT key.

2 Select View > Properties Window.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Data Manipulation

3 The Properties Sheet is displayed.

4 The Tag Number field in the Property Sheet will turns to ** when multiple instruments are selected as shown below.

Note: The ** represents dissimilar data between all select records.

5 Type Honeywell in the MANUFACTURER field.

6 Press Enter.

7 Close the Property Sheet.

Notice that the Manufacturer fields for both instruments are updated.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Data Manipulation

Adding and Deleting Components from the Views

There will be times when you will need to add and delete components. An individual instrument can be added to an existing loop by editing the loop and adding the component, but an individual tag can also be created outside of the loop environment in the instrument list view. When deleting loops, the associated terminal strips, cables and documents must also be considered. Instrumentation & Wiring will give you the option to delete these components when the loop is deleted.

Exercise 1: Adding an instrument outside of a loop.


2 To open the New Loop wizard.

3 Set Only New Instrument Tag.

4 Click Next >.

5 Type 205-FT-250 in the New INST field.

6 Click OK.

7 Click Finish.

The new tag is created. Note the new instrument tag is not associated to any loop.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Data Manipulation

Exercise 2: Deleting a loop

Prior to starting this exercise, open the Cable Schedule Instrumentation view and make note that there are two instrument cables for the loop 200-P-300.

1 Close the Cable Schedule Instrumentation view.

2 Open the Instrument List view.

3 Select any tag in the 200-P-300 loop.

4 Select Tools > Delete Tag.

5 Click Yes.

To delete the loop.

6 Click Yes.

To delete all of the associated instruments, cables and document

Note: All of the instruments associated with 200-P-300 were removed from the Instrument List view.

7 Open the Cable Schedule Instrumentation view.

The two instrument cables have also been deleted.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Assigning Project Standards


From within the Instrumentation & Wiring interface, you can build a loop for instruments automatically. This utility is very helpful when importing loops from an external source or when a different application, such as P&ID or Data Manager, has added instrument tags to the database.

Exercise 1: Assigning Project Standards

1 Select File > Assign Project Standards.

2 Set All Loops in Current Project.

3 Select the loop 100-P-100.

4 Select project standard FE, FT, FY,FV: Training Loopcon.dwg.

5 Click Assign.

6 Place a check next to 100-P-100.

7 Click Ok.

Note: The loop does not have to be edited; it has inherited the properties of the project standard that was created previously in this course.

Exercise 2: Sorting instruments within Assign Project Standards

1 Place cursor in the Loop Number field and right-click.

2 Select Sort > Sort Ascending.

3 Click Cancel.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 3: Resetting the DeleteTagNumbers flag

By default DeleteTagNumbers flag is set to Yes and allows users to delete the component tag from the project. In this exercise you will set the flag to DeleteTagNumbers = No. By setting it to No, when user tries to delete the tag from the project the tag is not deleted but its status is set as DEL. All the links of the tag are deleted but tag is not removed from the Project Database and is available in the project for future use.

1 Select Start > Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Project Tools > Project Administrator.

2 Expand the Project node.

3 Select Properties.

4 In the Project Properties window the Properties of the Category listed.

These values can be modified.

5 Select DeleteTagNumbers from Name column.

6 Type No in the Selected Value field.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


7 Press Enter.

8 Select File > Save.

To save the Project properties

9 Close Instrumentation & Wiring.

10 Re-launch I&W and open the Training project.

11 Open the Instrument List view.


To create a new Instrument tag.


14 Click Next >.

15 Type 400-FT-002 in the New INSTR field.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


16 Click OK.

17 Click Finish.

18 Select 400-FT-002 from Instrument List view.

19 Select Tools > Delete Tag.

To delete the instrument tag.

20 An Information dialog will open.

21 Click Yes.

Another message dialog opens confirming removal of the component links.

22 Click OK.

Observe the Status field for the tag is changed to DEL in the Instrument List view.

Note: If DeleteTagNumbers = Yes, tags can be deleted/purged from AutoPLANT P&ID. Also tags can be deleted/purged from Data Manager and Instrumentation & Wiring unless the tag has been inserted onto a P&ID or 3D model.

Note: If DeleteTagNumbers = No, tags deleted on a P&ID have their project status changed to DEL and all links removed from database. But they remain in the ProjDB and can be reused.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

System Queries

System Queries

The System Queries are views that were created to transfer data from the database to the loop templates. They are not intended to be customized liberally. The views should be carefully edited by the project administrator. Custom fields that have been added to the database tables can be added to the query views so that the data held in that field can be transferred to a template.

Note: Since no loops have been created in Layout Designer, the views will not contain data.

Open the System Queries node and double-click on the DocTokensLoop view. Scroll across the view and look at the fields provided. In the query shown above, note the field names TSTRIP, L1, L2, LTN and TN. The TSTRIP field will contain the name of the terminal strip. The L1, L2….fields will contain the link data which will guide the software to place a graphic symbol on the template. The TN field will contain the terminal number of the terminal strip. In this view there will be a record for each terminal on a terminal strip, therefore these views can become very large.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Reports

Reports

The Reports node contains a list of all of the reports provided by Bentley. These reports use the views as their data source. The reports can be easily modified using Microsoft Access Report Builder. Fields from the views can easily be added or deleted from the reports to access the data that is required by your company.

Expand the Reports node and double-click on the Instrument List report. In the report shown above, note the TAG Number and Description are shown for the instruments within the project. This report was set up to show the tag number with the description listed below. This report could be customized to show the description as a new column and then the description would be located next to the tag number. A new report can be designed to show the data found in any view within the project.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Instrument Templates

Instrument Templates

The instrument templates are drawings that contain tokens that will extract the data from the database and place onto the drawing. Bentley software provides the drawings in multiple formats. The .DWG AutoCAD and .DGN Microstation drawing formats are the most widely used. The templates provided will generate drawings for loops, terminal connection, and card connection drawings among others. Below is a template for a loop drawing.

1 Expand the Instrument Templates node.

2 In the Dwg folder find the xai.Dwg template.

3 Depending on your CAD format.

4 Right-click on the Xai template.

5 Select Edit from the context menu.

6 Select the Design tab to view the template.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Electrical Templates

The template shown contains graphics and text. The advantage to having the tokens as text is that your company drawings can be easily converted to templates. The graphics will not change, and the text can be converted to tokens. Note the tokens in the Junction Box column. If you look back at the System Queries for DocTokenLoop, the data in the TSTRIP field would be used for the token &I2b.TSTRIP and the data in the first TN field would be used for the token &I2b1.TN. Tokens are explained in depth in the I&W help file.

Electrical Templates

The Electrical Templates, just as with the Instrument Templates, are CAD based drawings with graphics and tokens. Bentley provides a Motor drawing and a single line drawing. When motors and MCC cabinets are built in I&W, these templates can be used to produce drawings for delivery.

Macros

Macros are available and use the Microsoft Access Macro Builder. Macros would normally be created for data manipulation.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Tables

Tables

The final node within the main Instrumentation & Wiring interface is the Tables node.

Located within this node are the primary database tables relating to Instrumentation. This is an interface for looking at the data within the tables. Because of the relationships that are created between the tables when a new tag is generated, you cannot add new data directly to these tables, but you can edit existing data.

Expand the Tables node and double-click on the INSTR table. Note that all of the instruments that have been created are located here. Browse across the fields and note that data has been added to this table that was system generated.

Note: Fields that are grayed out are system fields and cannot be edited.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review


Questions:

1 Which command would you use to view the FT instruments only?

2 You should not add data to the tables directly, why?

3 Can you use your own drawings as a template?

Answers:

1 The filter command would be used to view the FT instruments only.

2 Data added to the table directly is data contained within that table only and is not linked to the other necessary tables.

3 Yes, you can use your own drawings as templates; the text will have to be changed to a token format so that it will pull the data.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Layout Designer: Connecting
Components
Module Overview
Instrumentation & WiringIn this module, you are introduced to the Layout Designer, which can be used to connect the individual components of a loop, as well as to show existing connections between components. Components can be created within Layout Designer just as they were in the main Instrument & Wiring interface.




Module Objectives


• Create a new layout.

• Connect components on a layout.

• Allocate I/O to the instruments.

Feb-10 135 Layout Designer: Connecting Components


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Layout Designer: Connecting Components


Creating a Layout Drawing

Layout Designer is used to connect the individual components of a loop, as well as to show existing connections between components. It can also be used to create several types of layouts. For example, an area layout could be created to show the connections between all instruments, field panels, and DCS cabinets in a given area. A different layout could be created to show all field panels or card panels in the project. A component can reside on more than one layout. You also have the ability to copy and paste components from multiple layouts. Double-clicking on a connected instrument opens the Loop Connection view to isolate the connections of that instrument. Layout Designer also enables you to create and edit components that are either on a layout or in a list within the Component Bar. It should be noted that any component that can be built in the main Instrumentation & Wiring interface can also be created in the Layout Designer module. Several enhancements have been built into the V8i Edition. Assemblies can be created of loop configurations and stored to be used within the current project or with different projects. The dialogs have been opened up to allow you more flexibility. You will be introduced to the new features within the exercises of this module.

Exercise 1: Create A Layout Drawing

1 Select Applications > Layout Designer.

2 Select Layout > New Layout.

Layout Designer: Connecting Components 136 Feb-10Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Note: The New Layout Wizard allows you to give your layout a name and shows a list of all pre-existing layouts.

3 Type Analog Loops for Panel 200-JB-300 in the Description field.

4 Click Finish.

To create the first layout for the Training project. Layout Designer displays.

Note: The Component Bar displays the loops that are associated with the current project, as well as all individual instruments, cables, and panels. From the Components Bar, tags can be added, modified, and deleted by using the Actions toolbar within each of the tabs. The Component Bar also displays the name of the active list. Layout Designer provides options to display electrical and fieldbus components also. When you select any of the available tabs, the toolbar icons change to reflect the component currently in use.


6 Select Instrument Loop tags.

7 Select 200-F-300 from the Instrument Loops list.

8 Hold down the left mouse button to drag the tag onto the layout near the upper left-hand corner.

Feb-10 137 Layout Designer: Connecting ComponentsCopyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


9 Release the mouse button to place the graphics onto the layout.

Note: Notice that the cable tag graphics are green. From the following chart, determine what the individual component colors represent.

10 To illustrate the connection between an instrument and its cable, right-click on the horizontal line that connects the graphics of instrument 200-FT-300 and the graphics of the cable.

Component Color Definition of Connections

Red No Connections

Green Source Connected, Destination Unknown

Purple Source and Destination Known, No Connections Made

Blue Source and Destination Known, Source Connected

Yellow Source Disconnected

Grey Connected to Component on Different Layout

Black Source and Destination Connected

Cyan Source Known, Destination Unknown, Source not Connected


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


11 Select Connect to Instrument 200-FT-300 from the context menu.

Note: The Connect dialogs enable you to create component to component connections. These can be either multi-core cables or single-core connections.

Dialog Task: Definition of Task:

Save changes Saves the defined connections without closing the window.

Undo Changes Cancels all connections made and returns window to the original conditionas it was when the window was opened or the last save changes.

Show Connected instruments on Tstrip Opens the Instruments on Tstrip dialog and shows all connections on theterminal strip.

Show Connected Instrument on Cable Opens the Instruments on Cable dialog and shows all connections on theCable.

Show card I/O List Opens the Card I/O List dialog to show all I/O’s connected to the card.

Connect Connects the core or core set to the terminal or terminal set.

Disconnect Disconnects the core or core set from the terminal or terminal set.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Auto Connect to card Terminals Automatically connects all of the instruments connected in the I/O list to thecard terminals by first locating the last connected terminal for thatinstrument.

Find Destination Connection Changes the Destination window to display the destination of the connectedcable selected in the Source window.

Find Source Changes the Source window to display the source of the connected cableselected in the Destination window.

Edit Core List Displays the Edit Wire-Core List dialog which allows the creation ofadditional wire core colors and definitions.

Launch AutoConnect Displays the AutoConnect dialog which enables viewing all instrumentsconnected to the source or incoming terminal strip and of all instruments thathave been pre-allocated to cards that are connected to the destination oroutgoing terminal strip. This button is available only when connecting twoterminal strips together within the same panel

Assign Instrument Tag Opens the Allocate Instrument dialog which displays all instrumentsavailable to be connected/disconnected to the current panel.

Show/Hide Jumper Columns Opens the Select Jumper Column dialog to allow jumper columns to beviewed to the left or right of a source/destination terminal strip window.

Automatically Update Coretags Set this checkbox to automatically populate the Coretag1 and Coretag2fields with the source and destination tags for the selected cable.

Display ConnectedPanel Number

Set this checkbox to display the connected panel tag number within theSource and Destination windows.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The Connect Source Cores For Cable dialog shows that the cable is connected to the instrument as its source.

12 Close the dialog.

13 Select View > Detail Connection Window.

The Loop Connections window displays the loop in its present state.


15 Double-click on instrument 200-FT-300 on the layout.

The read-only view of the entire 200-F-300 loop displays as shown in the following figure.

Use Source Terminal Strip Set this checkbox to enable selecting internal Tstrips for panelscontaining at least 2 strips to allow internal panel connections.

Make R/R Connections Set this checkbox to allow right-right connections to be made on theterminal strips. It will open a RR&Term column.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Note: This feature becomes useful if the layout becomes cluttered with components and you need to see the instrument loop connections only.

16 Select View > Layout.

To return to the Analog Loops for Panel 200-JB-300 layout.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Connecting Components


In this section you are connecting instruments, field panels, and card panels. You will also allocate I/O for the tags that were created earlier. Finally, you learn how to internally wire your card panel.

Exercise 1: Connect Instruments to a Field Panel

1 Select Field Panels from the Instrumentation tab within the Component Bar.

2 Select 200-JB-300 from the Field Panels list.

3 Drag and drop the panel onto the layout.

Note: The junction box is color-coded red to indicate that no connections have been made.

4 Select the 200-FT-300 cable graphic.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


5 Click and hold the blue connection node, located in the center of the graphic, and then drag the line to the panel graphic.

Note: The cable color code is now blue. This indicates the cable knows its source and destination but only the source is connected. Also notice that the new line between the cable symbol and the field panel symbol has a node (click on the line and the node will appear).

6 Right-click on the right side of cable 200-FT-300.

7 Select Connect Cores in Panel 200-JB-300.

Note: This dialog displays the cable (and cores) in the left-hand pane (the source), and the field panel (and terminals) in the right-hand pane (the destination).


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


8 Select the Tset 1 box in the Destination window.

To make the terminal set active.

9 Select the Set 1 box in the Source window.

To activate the core set.

10 Click Connect.

To make the connection.

Note: Once the connection has been made, the connected terminal strip will refer to the junction box terminal strip and the connected cable will refer to the cable that has been connected.


12 Click Yes.

To save the changes.

Note: The cable color code is now black, indicating that the connections are complete.

Note: It is not necessary to connect the entire pair at one time. By clicking on the individual cores of the instrument, cores can be connected one at a time. This will be useful in cross wiring.

13 Repeat steps 4-12 and connect 200-FY-300 to TS-1, Tset 9.

14 Click on 200-FT-300.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The Loop Connections for [200-F-300] dialog displays all connections for the current loop.

Note: The Detail Connection Window provides a useful means of ensuring connections are correct.

Note: Since 200-FY-300 is part of the 200-F-300 loop, by clicking on 200-FT-300, all connected components of the loop are shown.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 2: Connect the Field Panel to the Card Panel

1 Click Card Panels.

2 Select 200-DCS300 from the Card Panels list.

3 Drag and drop the panel onto the layout.

4 Click Instrument (Control) Cables to display the Instrument Cables list.

5 Select 200-JB-300 from the Instrument Cables list.

6 Drag and drop the cable onto the layout above and between the field panel and card panel.

7 The following dialog opens.

8 Select 200-DCS-300 from the Cable Destination window.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


9 Click Connect.

Note: The cable is colored purple. The purple coloring indicates that the cable has a source and destination defined, but no cores have been terminated.

10 Right-click the left side of the cable between the cable tag and the field panel.

11 Select Connect Cores in Panel: 200-JB-300.

12 Hover your cursor over the blue text Cable [200-JB-300].

The cursor will change to the connect icon.

13 While holding down the left mouse button, drag the cursor to the top terminal (1+) of TSet 1 in the Source window.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



15 Click Yes.

Notice the cable color changes to blue (to indicate the source and destination are known, and the source is connected).

16 Right-click the right side of the cable between the cable tag and the card panel.

17 Select Connect Cores in Panel: 200-DCS-300.

18 The Connect Destination Cores For Cable [200-JB-300] dialog opens.

19 Select TB1 from the Tstrip list within the Destination window.

20 Hover the cursor over the blue text Cable [200-JB-300].

The cursor will change to the connect icon.

21 While holding down the left mouse button, drag the cursor to the top terminal (1) of TSet 1 in the Destination window.

Note: Since there are more terminals than cores, the OAS from cable 200-JB-300 will have to be disconnected and reconnected to the OAS for TB1.

22 Scroll down in the Destination window to terminal 25.

23 Double-click on terminal 25 to disconnect the OAS cable.

24 Scroll down in the Destination window to Tset 51 and select.

25 Select terminal 13 in the Source window.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


26 Double-click on terminal 13 to connect.


28 Click Yes.

Exercise 3: Allocate a Signal to a Card Channel

Note: This is a good exercise for engineers who would like to make the I/O allocations without having to wait until the loop is fully connected.

1 Select 200-DCS300 from the layout.

2 Select Layout > Allocate I/O.

3 Ensure AI is selected from the filter list (in the left-hand pane).


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


4 Ensure DCS300/AI- 01-01 is selected from the Cards list.

5 Select 200-FT-300 from the left-hand pane.

6 Select Channel 1 (from the right-hand pane).

7 Click Connect.

Tag 200-FT-300 is now connected to the DCS300/AI-01-01 card.

8 Select P from the Priority list.

To set this as the Primary connection point. Instrumentation & Wiring is capable of handling redundant systems.

9 Select AO from the filter list.

10 Select DCS300/AO-02-01 from the Cards list.

Note: Instrumentation & Wiring prompts you confirm the connection changes by displaying the Connect Instruments to Card I/O List in Panel – [200-DCS300] dialog.

11 Click Yes.

To save the connections and continue with the exercise.

12 Select 200-FY-300, and then connect to Channel 1.

13 Select P from the Priority list.

14 Click Save Changes.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 4: Internally Wire the Card Panel

1 Select 200-DCS300 from the layout.

2 Select Layout > Connect Internal Panel Wires: 200-DCS300.

3 Select TB1 from the Tstrip list within the Source window.

4 Set Use Source Terminal Strips.

Note: The check box at the bottom of the dialog labeled Use Source Terminal Strips. This option is available if no connections have been made to the panel or within the panel. If the panel was created from scratch, this option enables you to internally wire the cores.

5 Select DCS300/AI-01-01 from the Tstrip list within the Destination window.

Hint: You can change the color of the vendor supplied cable being terminated below by selecting it from the dropdown list located in the tool bar at the top of the window. Doing this prior to making any terminations has the best results.

6 Select Set 1 from the Destination window.

7 Double-click Set 1 from the Source window.

To make the connection.





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


11 Continue connecting all of the terminals for DCS300/AI-01-01.

12 Select DCS300/AO-02-01 from the Tstrip list within the Destination window.

13 Click Yes.


14 Select Set 1 from the Destination window.




18 Continue connecting all of the terminals.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


20 Click Yes.


21 Select panel 200-DCS300.


To view the card’s internal connections,

23 Select TB1 from the terminal strip list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review


Questions:

1 What is the significance in color coding the cables on the layout?

2 What is one purpose of the detail connection view?

3 In the connection dialog, can you connect cores individually?

Answers:

1 The color codes give you an instant visual to determine if the cable has been completely connected to both the source and destination.

2 The detail connection view gives a temporary graphical view of the loop to check for completeness as well as accuracy.

3 Cores can be connected individually or in sets in the connection dialog. Individually connected cores allows for cross wiring.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Layout Utilities
Module Overview

In this module you will learn how to manipulate the components found on the layout. You will add a border to the layout thus making it a document. You will create an assembly of a component group and then create terminal strips and cables outside of the loop dialog. You will create a new by defining the components that will be on the layout. You will finally learn to copy and paste components and to align the components so make the layout orderly.




Module Objectives


• Add a border to a layout.

• Create an assembly.

• Create terminal strips and cables.

• Create a detailed Layout.

• Copy and paste components.

• Align components on layout.

Feb-10 157 Layout Utilities


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Layout Designer Utilities


Adding a borders

Exercise 1: Adding a border to a layout

1 Select View > Documents Window.

2 Click on a blank space anywhere within the layout.

Note: The Documents dialog shows no defined documents. This because the IWD border has not been assigned to the current layout.

3 Click New Document Tag Number.

To display the New Document dialog.

4 Change the Tag Code to N.

5 Type LAYOUT in the New Document field.

6 Click OK.

To return to the Documents dialog.

7 Select LAYOUT.

8 Click Document Properties.

9 Select iwd from the Type list.

10 Select b_border.iwd from the Template list.

Layout Utilities 158 Feb-10Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


11 Change the file name to be LAYOUT.IWD.

12 Click OK.

To save the changes and close the Properties for Document dialog.

13 Close the Documents dialog.

14 Refresh the layout.

15 Zoom Out.

Feb-10 159 Layout UtilitiesCopyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


To view the entire border and contents.

16 After viewing the border, select File > Documents Window.

17 Delete the Layout document.

Exercise 2: Adding a border to the Detail Connection Window

1 Right-click on 200-FE-300.

2 Select Edit Loop.

To display the Edit Loop dialog.

3 Select the Doc tab.


To display the Setup New DOC_REG Tag Types dialog.

5 Select N in the Tag Code field.

6 Click OK.

To display the New DOC_REG dialog.

7 Type CONNECTION in the New DOC_REG field.

8 Click OK.

9 Select CONNECTION from the Doc tab.

10 Select iwd from the Type list (within the Properties window).

11 Select b_border.iwd from the Template list.

12 Set the Print Range to All.

13 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


To save the changes and close the Edit Loop dialog.

14 Select 200-FE-300 from the layout.


16 Zoom Out.

Notice the b_border.iwd has been added to the Detail Connection Window.

17 Close the Detail Connection Window.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Making an assembly

To preserve a complicated layout for future use, the assembly manager can be utilized. The layout configuration is stored and can be placed on a different layout at any time.

Exercise 1: Making an assembly of components

1 Using a window, select all of the instruments, field and card panels and any associated cables.

Note: Use the shift key to make additional windows.

2 Select Layout > Assembly Manager

3 Set Project Standards.

Options: Definitions:

Project Standards Assemblies stored with the current project.

Other standards Assemblies stored outside of current project.

Lead Assembly Launches the Browse for Folder dialog to enable navigation to storedassemblies located outside of project.

Insert Inserts the selected assembly into the layout.

Create Activates the Specify Assembly Name dialog. The new assembly is createdby typing a name into the AsemblyName field and clicking OK.

Delete Deletes the selected assembly.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


4 Click Create.

To open the Specify Assembly Name dialog.

5 Type Flow Loop into the AssemblyName field.

6 Click Ok.

The software returns to the Select Assembly dialog with your new assembly listed.

7 Highlight Flow Loop.

8 Click Insert.

9 Click OK.

To open the Edit Tags Numbers dialog.

10 Select the Group Name 200-F-300.

11 Click browse.

This will open the Edit Loop dialog so that you can give the components new tag numbers.

12 Select 200-F-300.

13 Click Edit.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


14 Modify the tag to be 200-F-700.

15 Change the Service from Refined Oil to Heat Exchanger to Oil Flow to Cooler.

16 Change CONNECTION to CONNECT.

17 Click OK.

To close the Edit Loop dialog.

18 Select the Group Name 200-JB-300.

19 Click browse.

This will open the Edit Field Panel dialog so that you can give the components new tag numbers.

20 Select 200-JB-300.

21 Click Edit.

22 Modify the tag to 200-JB-700.

23 Click OK.

24 Select the Group Name 200-DCS300.

25 Click browse.

This will open the Edit Card Panel dialog so that you can give the components new tag numbers.

26 Select 200-DCS300.

27 Click Edit.

28 Modify the tag to 200-PLC700.

29 Click OK.

30 Click OK.

To close the Edit Tag Numbers dialog.

31 Click on a point on the layout below the 200-F-300 loop to insert the graphics.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


32 Refresh the view.

Component Bar

Exercise 1: Filtering the component bar


2 Select Instruments.

3 Type 200-FT* in the Like…window.

Note: As you type in the Like window, the list becomes active and filters down.

The Component bar shows the transmitter instruments only.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



5 Click Clear Filter.

Association

Exercise 1: Associate an instrument to a loop

1 Select Create New Instruments.

2 Select Only New Instrument Tag.

3 Click Next.

4 Type 200-ALL-300.

5 Click OK.

6 Click Finish.

Note: You may have to select Refresh and All to view the new instrument.

7 Select 200-ALL-300.

8 Click Associate.

9 Set Loops.

10 Select 200-F-300.

11 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Note: The instrument is now associated with the loop 200-F-300, but will still need to have its terminal strip and cable defined.

Exercise 2: Associate an instrument to a panel

1 Select Create New Instruments.

2 Select Only New Instrument Tag.

3 Click Next.

4 Type 200-AHH-300.

5 Click OK.

6 Click Associate.

7 Set Panels.

8 Select 200-JB-300.

9 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating and Designing Terminal strips and Cables


Exercise 1: Create and design a new terminal strip

1 Drop instrument 200-ALL-300 onto the layout within the 200-F-300 grouping.


3 Click View > Tstrips Window.

4 Select New.

5 Select AT_TSTRIP from the Select Tagtype window.

6 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


7 Type 200-ALL-300 into the New field.

8 Click OK.


10 Click Design.

11 Add 3 terminals.

12 Click OK.

13 To return to the Tstrips dialog.

Exercise 2: Create and design a new cable

1 Select Instrument cables.

2 Select Create New Instrument Cables.

3 Select AT_CABLE.

4 Click OK.

5 Type 200-ALL-300 in the New Control Cable Tag Number field.

6 Click OK.

7 Drag and drop cable 200-ALL-300 onto the layout next to the 200-ALL-300 graphic.

8 Select 200-ALL-300 as the Cable Source.

9 Select 200-JB-300 as the Cable Destination.

10 Click Connect.

11 Select View > Tstrips Window.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Note: The dialog has now converted to a cable dialog providing the ability to design the cable outside of the Edit Loop dialog.

12 Add a 3 core cable.

13 Click OK.

To return to the Cable Window.

14 Right-click on the left cable between instrument and cable graphic.

15 Select Connect to Instrument from the context menu.

16 Connect cable 200-ALL-300 to the instrument terminal strip in the Connect Source dialog.

17 Close dialog and save connections.

18 Right-click on the right cable between the cable graphic and the field panel.

19 Select Connect Cores from the context menu.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


20 Connect cable to TS-1 row set 2.

21 Close dialog and save connections.

22 The Instrument has been successfully connected to the junction box.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating New Layouts


Exercise 1: Creating a component defined layout

1 Select Create New Layout.

2 Type Area 700 in the Description field.

3 Click Next.

4 With Instruments set in the Components group box, select 200-FT-700 and 200-FY-700.

5 Add the selected items to the Selected Components window.

6 Set Instrument Cables.

7 Select 200-FT-700, 200-FY-700 and 200-JB-700.

8 Add them to the Selected Components window.

9 Set Panels.

10 Select 200-JB-700.

11 Add it to the Selected Components window.

12 Set PLC/DCS Cards.

13 Select 200-PLC700.

14 Add it to the Selected Components window.

15 Click Finish.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


16 Select layout Area 700 from the layout list.

Note: The connections are already complete because the 200-F-700 loop was an assembly that was inserted into the Training Analog Loops for Panel 200-JB-300. Non-connected components can be added to the layout and will have to be connected manually.

Exercise 2: Aligning components on layout

1 Select Analog Loops for Panel 200-JB-300 from the layout list.

2 Zoom out.

So that all components on layout can be viewed.

3 Place a window around the left side of the instrument graphics.

4 Select Tools > Align Left.

5 Select the left side of the cable graphics.


7 Select the left side of the field box graphics.


9 Select the right side of the card panel graphics.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



Exercise 3: Copy and Paste Components

1 Select layout Area 700 from the layout list.


3 Drag and drop field panel 200-JB-301 onto the layout.

4 Select Instrument Loops.

5 Drag and drop 100-T-100 onto the layout.

6 Connect cable 100-TT-100 to TS-1 Tset 1 in 200-JB-301.

7 Close dialog and save the connections.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


8 Place a window around the 100-TT-100 instrument and cable graphics as well as the graphic for field panel 200-JB-301.

9 Select Layout > Copy.

10 Switch to layout Analog Loops for 200-JB-300.

11 Select Layout > Paste.

12 Move graphics and align with other components on layout.

Exercise 4: Edit Layout Definition

1 Select Edit Layout Definition.

2 Change layout description of Analog Loops for Panel 200-JB-300 to Analog Loops.

3 Click OK.

Exercise 5: Deleting a layout.

1 Select layout Area 700.

2 Select Delete Selected Layout.

3 Click Yes.

To delete.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review


Questions:

1 Why was the description changed on the layout?

2 Do terminal strips and cables have to be created and designed within the new or edit loop dialogs?

3 Can a component be shown on more than one layout?

4 Why would you want to place a border around a layout or a detailed connection?

Answers:

1 The original description indicated that the components were specifically for 200-JB-300 and when instrument 200-FT-312 was added, the description was no longer valid.

2 No, within Layout Designer, you can create and design terminal strips and cables via the Terminal Strip/Cable dialog.

3 Yes.

4 By placing borders around a layout or a detailed connection, they can become tangible documents that could be distributed to maintenance for a turn around.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Instrumentation Drawings
Module Overview

In this module, you are introduced to the CAD drawing generation features of Instrumentation & Wiring. These drawings fall into three categories; auto-generated drawings for loop and panel connection details, template-based loop and panel diagrams, and IWD drawings to make quick loops from the layouts.




Module Objectives


• Create auto-generated loop drawings.

• Create auto-generated panel drawings.

• Copy templates.

• Modify templates.

• Delete templates.

Feb-10 177 Instrumentation Drawings


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



In this section you learn to create an auto-generated loop based.

Exercise 1: Creating an Auto-Generated Loop Drawing

1 Launch Instrumentation & Wiring.


3 Select the Analog Loops layout.


5 Select 200-FT-700 from the layout.

6 Select 200-F-700.

7 Select Properties.

8 Select .dwg as the Type.

9 Select Loopcon.dwg as the Template.

10 Set the Print Range to All.

11 Click OK.

12 Click Regenerate/Save Document.

Instrumentation Drawings 178 Feb-10Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


13 Click View Document.

Note: The LOOPCON.DWG template is a blank template which is generated based on the data of the loop. This template can eliminate the need for multiple templates.


To close the Preview window.

15 Close the Documents for Loop dialog.

Exercise 2: Assign Symbols To The Instruments

1 Right-click on instrument 200-FT-700.

2 Select Edit Loop: 200-F-700.



Feb-10 179 Instrumentation DrawingsCopyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


5 In the Loop Properties window, click browse in the Loop Symbol field.

6 Scroll down in the Files window to find symbol fd-tr2.dwg.

7 Click OK.

The symbol has now been assigned to the instrument for auto generated drawings.

8 Repeat steps 5 thru 7 for instrument 200-FY-700.

9 Save and close the Edit Loop dialog.

Preview the drawing using the steps in Exercise 1.

Exercise 3: Creating an Auto-Generated Panel drawing

1 Select 200-JB-700.


3 Select 200-JB-700 in the Documents for Panel window.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


4 Click Regenerate/Save Document.



To return to the Documents for Panel dialog.

7 Close the Documents for Panel dialog.

Note: The steps are the same for creating an auto-generated loop or an auto-generated panel. The difference is in the properties of the document as shown below. The Doc Application determines what type of document will be generated as well as the template selected.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Templates

Templates

Exercise 1: Opening a Template

1 Selecting Actions > Exit.

To close Layout Designer and return to the main Instrumentation & Wiring interface.

2 Expand the Instrument Templates node.

3 Expand the DWG node.

4 Select Xaiao.dwg from the DWG templates.

5 Right-click to select Edit from the context menu.

6 Click Design.

To launch Template Generator and display the Templates Settings dialog.

7 Click Done.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Templates

The drawing Xaiao opens in AutoCAD.

Note: This drawing represents a typical Bentley-supplied template. The template has two instruments (an input instrument and an output instrument), and can be used for the flow control loop that was created in previous chapters.

8 ZOOM IN to the drawing as shown below.

9 Type DDEDIT in the Command line.

10 Press Enter.

The prompt Select an annotation object or [Undo] displays.

11 Select the token &I2a.ITYP.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Templates

The text is highlighted as shown below.

Note: The screen captures documented in this material represent ACAD 2006 operating in the Windows XP environment. If you are not running this version and environment, your AutoCAD dialogs may vary from what is presented.

Note: The "&" character directs the software to extract information from the database. The "I" character indicates that the data is an instrument. The "2" character indicates that the data is located second in order within the database. The "a" character indicates the data is in connection position A. The “ITYP” characters indicate the field in which the data resides. For a better understanding of tokens, refer to the Template Generator on-line help.

12 Press Esc.

To cancel the DDEDIT command

13 Type LIST at the Command line.

14 Press Enter.

15 The prompt Select objects: displays.

16 Select the instrument bubble around &I2a.ITYP.

Notice that it is a circle, and not a block. Because the templates are just lines, circles, and text, any customer drawing can be used as a template.

17 Press Esc.

To cancel the LIST command.

18 Zoom Out to the full extents of the drawing.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Templates

Practice zooming in and out of the drawing to become familiar with the different types of tokens on the drawing.


To close the drawing.

Warning: Do not save any changes you may have made.

Exercise 2: Create a new template from an existing template

1 Right-click on Xaiao.dwg.

2 Select New.

3 Select From current Template: Xaiao.dwg.

4 Click OK.

5 Type Xaiao_Modified in the Name field.

6 Type Modified Analog Input-Analog Output Loop in the Description field.

7 Click OK.

8 Right-click on Xaiao_Modified.dwg in the templates list.

9 Select Edit.

10 Click Design in the Edit Template dialog.

AutoCAD opens Template Generator.

11 Set Auto Generate to NO.

12 Click Done in the Template Settings dialog.

13 Note that there are 2 Marshalling Panel columns. Minimize AutoCAD and launch Layout Designer from Instrumentation & Wiring.

14 Select 200-FT-700.


Note: The detail connection that there is a field panel and a card panel. The template needs to be modified to reflect the loop. Make note of the headers in the detail connection window. The A, B, C and D headers relate directly to the loop.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Templates

16 Maximize AutoCAD.

17 Zoom in around the “C” column.

18 Remove the graphics and text.

19 Move “D” graphics to center of column.

20 Using the DDEDIT command, change all tokens with a “d” reference to “c”.

21 Change the token text on the left side of terminal strip from “c” to “b”.

Hint: If you are unsure of what the token should be, maximize Layout Designer and the Detail Connection Window. Hover the cursor over the terminals and the token will appear.

Xaiao_Modified.dwg appears as below.

Exercise 2: Add a New Document to Loop 200-F-700

1 Select View > Instrument List.

2 Select 200-FT-700 from the Instrument List.


To display the Documents for Loop dialog.

4 Click New Document Tag Number.

To display the New Document dialog.

5 Select N from the list located in the Status group box.

To change the tag format.

6 Type Flow Loop in the New Document field.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Templates

7 Click OK.

8 To create the new document and close the New Document dialog.

You have now created a new document for loop 200-F-700.

9 Select Flow Loop.

10 Click Document Properties.

11 Type Loop Diagram in the Description field.

12 Select Xaiao_Modified.dwg from the Template list.

13 Select All from the Print Range list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Templates

Note: This dialog enables you to select a range of terminals or cores to be printed on the current document. There is no limitation to the number of terminal strips that can be selected.

14 Click OK.

To accept the selection and return to the Properties for Document dialog.

15 Click OK.

16 To accept the changes made in the Properties for Document dialog and return to the Documents for Loop dialog.

17 Select Flow Loop.

18 Click Preview Document.



Exercise 3: Deleting a Template from a Loop



3 Select CONNECT.

4 Click Delete Document.

5 Click Yes.

To confirm deletion.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review


Questions:

1 Can a loop have more than one document?

2 How does the software know which template to use to auto-generate a drawing for a component?

3 What does the “&” stand for in the token, the numeral?

Answers:

1 Yes, a loop can have multiple documents assigned to it.

2 The Doc Application property and the template selected determine how the autogenerated document is created?

3 The “&” directs the software to search the databases, the numeral tells the software the order of the component it needs to pull.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Powered Instrument Loop
Module Overview

In this module, you are introduced to some of the electrical features of Bentley Instrumentation & Wiring. You create a powered level transmitter and connect it to a distribution board for the instrument’s power supply. You also connect the level transmitter into an existing analog junction box.




Module Objectives


• Create signal and power supply terminals.

• Create a power supply cable.

• Add an electrical cable to the layout.

• Connect the electrical cable.

• Create a power distribution board.

• Create a power terminal strip.

• Create a distribution board cable.

• Add the electrical panel to the layout.

Feb-10 191 Powered Instrument Loop


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Powered Loop


In this section, you build a new loop from an existing standard, and then modify the loop to meet the specific needs. Once the loop has been generated, you create power supply terminals, and create a new power cable.

Exercise 1: Create a New Loop from Standards



3 Click Instrument Loops.


To display the New Instrument Loop – Step 1 dialog.

5 Set From Standards.

6 Click Next >.

7 To display the New Instrument Loop – Step 2 dialog.

8 Click Select From.

9 Set System Library.

10 Click OK.

11 Select LT from the list of standards available in the New Instrument Loop – Step 2 dialog.

12 Click Next >.

13 Type 200-L-300 in the Loop Tag field.

14 Click OK.

Powered Instrument Loop 192 Feb-10Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


15 Click Finish.

16 Type Powered Level Transmitter Loop in the Service Description field.

Exercise 2: Create Signal and Power Supply Terminals


2 Select 200-LT-300.

3 Click Design.

Note: The existing signal terminals are displayed with the + and – terminals as part of TSet 1.

4 Select TSet 1.

5 Click Insert from the Terminal Set group box.

6 Type L, N and G into the Term column for each respective row.

Feb-10 193 Powered Instrument LoopCopyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


7 Click OK.

Note: The new power terminals have been inserted as TSet 1 and the signal terminals how been moved down to TSet 2.

8 Click OK.

To save the changes and close the Edit TSTRIP [200-LT-300] dialog.

9 Click OK.

To save loop 200-L-300.

Exercise 3: Create a Power Supply Cable

1 Select the Electrical tab.

2 Click Electrical Cables.

3 Click Create New Electrical Cables.

4 Set the Tag Code to T-N.

5 Type PWR-001 in the New Electrical Cable Tag Number field.

6 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Add Loop to the Layout


In this section, you add the new powered loop to the existing layout (Analog Loops). You will add the electrical cable to the layout and design the cores. Finally you will connect the electrical cable to the instrument.

Exercise 1: Add a Transmitter to the Layout

1 Select the loops 200-F-700 and 200-FT-700 on the layout.

2 Move these components down on the layout as shown.


4 Click Instruments.

5 Drag and drop 200-LT-300 onto the layout beneath 200-F-300.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


6 Arrange the symbols so that the layout appears similar to the figure.

Exercise 2: Add an Electrical Cable to the Layout


2 Click Electrical Cables.

3 Drag PWR-001 onto the layout below the 200-LT-300 cable.

To display the Connect Cable dialog.

4 Select 200-LT-300 as the Cable Source and leave the Cable Destination blank.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


5 Click Connect.

6 Right-click on the line connecting cable PWR-001 to 200-LT-300.

7 Select Connect to Instrument.

This dialog displays because the cores for cable PWR-001 have not yet been defined.

8 Click OK.

9 Click OK.

To close the Connect Cores For Cable dialog

10 Select View > Tstrips Window.

11 Select PWR-001.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Note: The Tstrips Window displays terminal strip tags when instruments and panels are selected on a layout. When a cable is selected, the Tstrips Window changes to become a Cables window.

12 Select PWR-001 from the Cable dialog.

13 Click Design.

To display the Edit Cable [PWR-001] dialog.

14 Add three cores as shown below.

15 Click OK.

To return to the Edit Cable [PWR-001] dialog.

16 Click OK.

To save changes and close the Edit Cable [PWR-001] dialog.

17 Close the Cable dialog.

Exercise 3: Connect the Electrical Cable

1 Right-click on the line connecting cable PWR-001 to 200-LT-300.

2 Select Connect to Instrument.

To display the Connect Source Cores For Cable [PWR-001] dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


3 Connect Cable PWR-001 Set 1 to Instrument Tstrip 200-LT-300 Tset 1.


5 Close the Connect Source Cores For Cable [PWR-001] dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating an Electrical Panel


In this section you learn to create an electrical panel to act as a power distribution board for the level transmitter. You also learn to create the power terminal strip, the distribution board cable, and then you add the panel to the layout and make the connections.

Exercise 1: Create a Power Distribution Board


2 Click Electrical Panels.


To display the New Electrical Panel – Step 1 dialog.

4 Set From Scratch.

5 Click Next >.

6 Type Power Distribution Board in the Electrical Panel Remarks field.

7 Click Next >.

8 Select T-N from the Cable Type Tag Code list.

9 Click Next >.

10 Type 200-DB-01 in the New Electrical Panel – Step 3 field.

11 Click OK.

To display the New Electrical Panel – Step 4 dialog.

12 Click Finish.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 2: Create a Power Terminal Strip


2 Select Tstrip 200-DB-01.

3 Click Edit.


4 Set the Tag Code to T-N.

5 Type PTS-01 in the Edit TSTRIP field.

6 Click OK.

7 Select the terminal strip PTS-01.

8 Click Design.

9 Click Add.

10 Define the terminal set as shown below.

11 Click OK.

To create the terminals and return to the Edit TSTRIP dialog.

12 Click Add.

To display the Add Terminal Set dialog to add an overall ground.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


13 Define the overall ground as shown below.

14 Click OK.

15 Add the links using the Links toolbar as shown below.

16 Click OK.

To return to the New Electrical Panel dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 3: Design the Distribution Board Cable


2 Select DB-01.

3 Click Design.

4 Click Add.

5 Define the cores as shown below.

6 Click OK.

To return to the New Cable dialog.

7 Click OK.

To return to the New Electrical Panel dialog.

8 Verify that the cable DB-01 has panel 200-DB-01 specified as its Source (within the Cable Properties window).

9 Click OK.

To save the new electrical panel.

Exercise 4: Add the Electrical Panel to the Layout

1 Drag and drop 200-DB-01 from the Electrical Panels list onto the layout to the right of cable PWR-001.

2 Select DB-01 from the Electrical Cables list onto the layout to the right of panel 200-DB-01.

3 Right-click on the line between DB-01 and 200-DB-01.

4 Select Connect cores in panel.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


5 Terminate the cores of cable DB-01 onto terminals L1, N1, and G1 on PTS-01.


7 Close the Connect Source Cores For Cable dialog.

8 Select cable PWR-001 from the layout.

9 Drag and drop the connection node onto electrical panel 200-DB-01.

10 Right-click on the right side of cable PWR-001.

11 Select Connect Cores in Panel.

To display the Connect Destination Cores For Cable dialog.

12 Terminate PWR-001 onto terminals L1, N1, and G1.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Completing the Loop


14 Close the Connect Destination Cores For Cable dialog.

Completing the Loop

In this section you connect the level transmitter into junction box 44-JBA-300, and create a new loop document.

Exercise 1: Connect the Level Transmitter to the Junction Box

1 Select cable 200-LT-300 from the layout.

2 Drag the connection node onto field panel 200-JB-300.

3 Right-click on the right side of cable 200-LT-300.

4 Select Connect Cores In Panel.

To display the Connect Destination Cores For Cable dialog.

5 Connect cable 200-LT-300 onto terminals 3+, 3-, and SCR.


7 Close the Connect Destination Cores For Cable dialog.

8 Select instrument 200-LT-300 from the layout.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Completing the Loop


All connections for loop 200-L-300 are now shown.

10 Close the Detail ConnectionWindow.

Note: All connections from the level transmitter to the analog input card have been automatically assigned because the junction box, multi-core cable and card panel had been pre-connected and terminated.

Exercise 2: Create A New Document


2 Select Layout > Edit Loop.


4 Click New.

To display the Setup New DOC_REG Tag Types dialog.

5 Select N from the Tag Codes field.

6 Click OK.

To display the New DOC_REG dialog.

7 Type POWER LOOP in the New DOC_REG field.

8 Click OK.

9 Select POWER LOOP from the Doc tab.

10 Select Xpai.dwg from the Template list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Completing the Loop

11 Set the Print Range to ALL.

12 Click OK.

To save these changes and close the Edit Loop dialog.



15 Select POWER LOOP.

16 Click Preview Document.

17 Selecting File > Exit.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review


Questions:

1 Why did you insert the new terminal set instead of add it?

2 Why did you type ELECT into the Cable Application field?

Answers:

1 It does not matter if you insert or add a terminal set; the terminal set was inserted in this case so the layout would show the distribution panel above the field panel.

2 ELECT was typed into the Cable Application field so that the cable would be shown as an electrical cable instead of an instrument cable.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Intrinsically Safe Loop
Module Overview

In this module, you learn how to create an intrinsically safe loop. This loop requires building a device in a field panel then cross-wiring the device to the loop.




Module Objectives


• Place jumpers.

• Create a device.

• Jumper terminals.

• Connect to a device.

Feb-10 209 Intrinsically Safe Loop


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Building an Intrinsically Safe Loop


In this module you will build the intrinsically safe loop similar to the one shown below.

Exercise 1: Creating the Loop

1 Create a new instrument loop for 200-TT-301 from the system standard TT.

Exercise 2: Creating the New Field Panels.


2 Select New Field panel.

3 Set From Scratch.

4 Type Intrinsically Safe Barrier Panel in the Field Panel Remarks field.

Intrinsically Safe Loop 210 Feb-10Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


5 Click Next >.

6 Click Next >.

7 Type 200-LJB-300 in the New Field Panel field.

8 Click Ok.

9 Click Finish.

Exercise 3: Create the Intrinsically Safe Barrier

1 Select the Dev tab.

2 Click New.

To open the Setup New Device Tag Types dialog.

3 Select AT_DEVICE from the Device Tag Types list.

4 Select N from the Tag Codes list.

5 Click OK.

To close the dialog and open the New Device dialog.

6 Type ISB1 in the New Device field.

7 Click Ok.

8 Click Design.

Feb-10 211 Intrinsically Safe LoopCopyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


To open the Device Builder tool.

9 Using the arrows on the left and right, add two terminals to each side.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


10 Double-click on each of the terminals and change the text as shown.

Exercise 4: Internally Connect the Barrier.

1 Click Connect.

2 Select terminal 11 and terminal 13.

3 Click Connect Device Terminals.

To interconnect the terminals.

4 Select terminal 12 and terminal 14.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


5 Click Connect Device Terminals.

6 Click OK.

7 Select the Cable tab, click Design and then click Add.

8 Set the Cores to 2.

9 Set the Repeat to 8.

10 Type 1 and 2 respectively in the Core field.

11 Click OK.

12 Click OK.


13 Click OK.

To save and close the New Field Panel Dialog.

14 Create another new field panel from scratch.

15 Type Isolated 24VDC Power Source in the Field Panel Remarks field.

16 Type 200-PS-301 as the field panel number.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


17 Design the terminal strip as shown below.

18 Design the cable as shown below.

19 Click OK.

20 Click OK.

21 To return to the New Field Panel dialog.

22 Click OK.

Exercise 5: Editing the Existing Junction Box 200-JB-301

1 Select the Field Panels.

2 Highlight the junction box 200-JB-301.

3 Select Edit Tag.

The Edit Field Panel dialog opens.


5 Click New.

To open the Setup New Tstrip Tag Types dialog.

6 Set the Tag Codes to T-N.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


7 Leave the Also Create Cable set.

8 Click OK.

To open the New TSTRIP dialog.

9 Type TS-3 in the New TSTRIP field.

10 Click OK.


12 Select TS-3.

13 Click Design.

14 Click Add.

To open the Add Terminal Set dialog.

15 Modify as shown below.

16 Click OK.

To create the terminal strip and return to the Edit Terminal Strip dialog.

17 Click Add.

18 Add one terminal.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


20 Add links to the terminals as shown below.

21 Click OK.

22 Click New.

23 Clear Also Create Cable.

24 Type PS-1 in the New TSTRIP field.

25 Click OK.

26 Select PS-1 from within the Tstrip window.

27 Click Design.

28 Click Add.

29 Add the terminal sets as shown below.

30 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


31 Add links as shown in the following figure.

32 Click OK.


33 Select the Cable Tab.

34 Highlight TS-3.

35 Design as shown below.

36 Click OK.

37 Click OK.


38 Click OK.

To save and close the Edit Field Panel dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 6: Creating a new Card Panel 200-DCS301

1 Select the Card Panels.

2 Highlight 200-DCS300.

3 Select New Tag.

4 Create a new card from the system standard AB-AI,AO,AI,AI,AO.

5 Click Ok.

6 Select the tag type A-M.

7 Name the panel 200-DCS301.

8 Click OK.

To save and close the dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Connecting the Loop

Connecting the Loop

In this section you connect all of the components that were created.

Exercise 1: Create a New Layout


2 Type Intrinsically Safe Loops in the Description field.

3 Click Finish.

4 Drag and drop all components of the loop onto the layout.

Exercise 2: Internally Connecting 200-JB-301

1 Right-click on 200-JB-301.

2 Select Connect Panel.

3 Select TS-3 in the Destination Panel window.

4 Click on terminal F1.

A large downward arrow appears.

5 Drag the arrow down to terminal 2.

This will place a jumper between the two terminals.

6 Repeat step 4 and place jumpers from all fused terminals to the terminals right below them.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Connecting the Loop

7 Tstrip TS-3 displays.

Once the jumpers have been added, its time to cross wire the terminal strips.

8 Connect terminal 1+ from PS-1 to terminal F1 on TS-3.

9 Connect terminal 1- from PS-1 to terminal 4 on TS-3.

10 Click Save.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Connecting the Loop

Exercise 2: Connecting the Intrinsically Safe Barrier

1 Select the graphic for cable 200-TT-301.

2 Grab the center node and drag and drop onto 200-LJB-300.

3 Right-click on the new graphics line.


5 Select ISB1 from the Tstrip list in the Destination panel.

6 Connect the WH core of 200-TT-301 to terminal 11 of ISB1.

7 Connect the BK core of 200- TT-301 to terminal 12 of ISB1.

8 Save and close the Connect Destination Cores For Cable dialog.

9 Select Instrument Control Cables.

10 Drag and drop cable 200-LJB-300 onto the layout between 200-LJB-300 and 200-JB-301.

11 Select 200-JB-301 as the Cable Destination.

12 Click Connect.

13 Right-click on the connection between cable 200-LJB-301 and field panel 200-LJB-300.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Connecting the Loop

To open the following dialog.

15 Select ISB1 from the Tstrip list in the Source Pane.

16 Connect terminal 13 of ISB1 to core 1 of cable 200-LBJ-301.

17 Connect terminal 14 of ISB1 to core 2 of cable 200-LJB-301.

18 Save and close the Connect Source Cores For Cable dialog.

Note: The barrier is now connected on both side and this can be confirmed by looking at the detail connection view. The ISB1 shown in the detail connection view will show a left connection and a right connection. The right connection does not appear to be connected because the cable has not been terminated on its destination side.

Exercise 3: Completing the Connections


2 Drag and drop 200-PS-301 onto the layout to the right of 200-JB-301.

3 Select Instrument Cables.

4 Drag and drop 200-PS-301 onto the layout between 200-PS-301 and 200-JB-301.

5 Designate 200-JB-301 as the destination for cable 200-PS-301.

6 Right-click on cable 200-PS-301 between 200-PS-301.

7 Connect to terminal strip 200-PS-301.

8 Connect 1H to 1BK and 2N to 1WH.

9 Right-click on cable 200-PS-301 between 200-JB-301.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Connecting the Loop

10 Connect to terminal strip PS-1.

11 Connect 1BK to 1+ and 1WH to 1-.


13 Click on the graphic for cable 200-LJB-300.

14 Drag and drop node onto 200-JB-301.

15 Connect core 1 of cable 200-LJB-300 to terminal 2 of TS-3.

16 Connect core 2 of cable 200-LJB- 300 to terminal 3 of TS-3.

17 Save and close the dialog.

18 Select Instrument Control Cable.

19 Drag and drop cable TS-3 onto the layout between 200-JB-301 and 200-DCS301.

20 Designate 200-DCS301 as the destination for the cable.

21 Click Connect.

22 Right-click on the link between the cable TS-3 and the junction box 200-JB-301.


24 Select TS-3 from the Tstrip list in the Source pane.

25 Connect core 1 of cable TS-3 to terminal 3 of TS-3.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Connecting the Loop

26 Connect core 2 of TS-3 to terminal 4 of TS-3.

27 Save and close the Connect Source Cores For Cable dialog.

28 Right-click on the link between the cable TS-3 and DCS panel 200-DCS301.


30 Select AI-02-06 from the Tstrip list of the Destination pane.

31 Connect cores 1 and 2 of TS-3 to Tset 1 of AI-02-06 terminals 15V and A1.


33 Select 200-TT-301.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Connecting the Loop

To view the connectivity of your new loop.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review


Questions:

1 How do you create a jumper on a terminal strip?

2 Where is a device created?

3 What step was not taken to fully complete this loop?

Answers:

1 Click the terminal and move the down arrow to the appropriate terminal to create a jumper between the two terminals.

2 A device is created in the field panels.

3 The I/O was not connected.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Course Summary
Course Summary

You are now able to use the Bentley Instrumentation & Wiring application as a tool to increase your productivity when creating instrumentation documents.


• Navigate through the Instrumentation & Wiring application.

• Build Loop Components.

• Build Field and Card Panels.

• Manipulate Data .

• Connecting Components.

• Create Instrumentation Drawings.

• Build a Powered Loop.

• Build an Intrinsically Safe Loop.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Course Review

Course Review


Questions

1 True/False: Loop tags can only be created within the Instrumentation views?

2 Does a terminal strip have to be designed within the New Loop or Edit Loop dialogs?

3 How would you keep a collection of instruments on a layout to use again?

4 True/False: Applications are launched from the Instrumentation & Wiring interface?

5 Can you modify multiple tags at once?

6 What components are used to build an instrument?

7 What is the Detail Connection Window used for?

8 Can a loop have more than one document?

9 How would you connect one instrument to two panels?

10 Can loops be shown on more than one layout?

11 How would you keep a loop with defined instruments, terminal strips and cables?

12 What is an instrument terminal strip?

13 How would you create a terminal with multiple cable connections?

14 Is it possible to put a border on a layout so that it can be released as a document?

15 If you needed a relay in a junction box, how would you show it?

16 What is a Card Panel?

17 Can instrument tags be added in the Layout Designer?

18 How can you tell if a component is connected on a layout?

19 Can two wires be placed on one terminal?

20 Can I/O be assigned to a tag without the instrument being connected to the I/O panel?

21 Can you change the template for a tag?

22 Can devices be added to loops?


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Course Review

Answers

1 False, Loop tags can be generated within the Instrumentation views as well as the Layout Designer.

2 No, a terminal strip can be designed within the TSTRIP dialog.

3 By creating an assembly of the instruments, the layout can be used over and over.

4 True, applications are launched from the Instrumentation & Wiring Applications menu.

5 Yes, by selecting the instruments to be modified and then selecting the properties icon, all of the instruments can be modified at once.

6 An instrument, instrument terminal strip and instrument cables make up an instrument loop.

7 The Detail Connection Window is used to see the graphical connection of the instruments.

8 Yes, a loop can have several documents.

9 By adding an additional terminal strip and cable, the instrument can be connected to two separate panels.

10 Yes, loops can be shown on multiple loops.

11 Creating a loop standard will save the configuration of instruments, terminal strips and cables for multiple use.

12 An instrument terminal strip is the connection points on an instrument available for wiring.

13 Cloning the terminal will graphically show multiple cables tied to one terminal.

14 Yes, the layout and detail connection can both have borders assigned to them and therefore become a document for delivery.

15 Create the relay as a device in the junction box.

16 A card panel is a panel containing multiple components like landing terminal strips, power supplies, card racks and I/O cards.

17 Yes, new instrument tags can be added in either the Instrumentation & Wiring interface or in the Layout Designer interface.

18 A component is fully connected if its color on the layout is black.

19 Yes, by cloning a terminal, two wires can be placed on a terminal.

20 Yes, if the tag is existing in the instrument list, it can be assigned I/O without being connected to the I/O panel.

21 Yes, you can edit the templates via AutoCAD or Microstation.

22 Yes, relays and other devices can be connected and shown on the Instrumentation & Wiring loops.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Course Review


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

TRN011520-1/0002

Bentley FOUNDATION Fieldbus FundamentalsV8i (SELECTseries1)


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Trademarks




Patents


Copyrights


Bentley FOUNDATION Fieldbus Fundamentals 234 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Course Overview
Course Description

FOUNDATION fieldbus is an all-digital, serial, two-way communications system that allows the connection of intelligent field instruments to a DCS system.

Fieldbus technology replaces the expensive, conventional 4 - 20 mA wiring in the field and enables bi-directional data transmission. The entire communication between the devices and the automation system as well as the process control station takes place over the bus system. All operating and device data is exclusively transmitted over the fieldbus.

The essential objectives in fieldbus technology are to reduce installation costs, save time and costs due to simplified planning, and improve the operating reliability of the system due to additional performance features.

This course will concentrate on building FOUNDATION Fieldbus segments containing instruments, spurs, Megablocks (sometimes referred to as Bricks or Field Termination Blocks) and trunk cables into an H1 I/O card.

Target Audience


• Novice instrumentation designers and drafters who are familiar with FOUNDATION Fieldbus concepts.

• The course could also be used as a refresher course for more advanced users who have not used the software for a time.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Prerequisites

Prerequisites

• Working knowledge of FOUNDATION Fieldbus Instrumentation design concepts.

• A minimum of six months experience with either Bentley Microstation V8 or AutoCAD.

• Completion of the Bentley Instrumentation and Wiring Fundamentals course.

Course Objectives


• Design a Fieldbus Instrument.

• Create an association to an instrument loop.

• Create an association to Fieldbus Segment.

• Create a fieldbus panel.

• Design Bricks/Megablocks and Tstrips in the fieldbus panel.

• Design the internal cables for the fieldbus panel and segment trunk cables.

• Add and connect segment terminators inside the fieldbus panel.

• Save the fieldbus panel as a standard.

• Create a new fieldbus panel from a standard.



• Design the H1 card.

• Add a new H1 card to the existing panel.


• Creating loops using Multiplexers.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Modules Included

Modules Included


• Building a FOUNDATION Fieldbus Segment.

• Building Fieldbus Panels.

• Building I/O Card Panels for H1 Cards.

• Layout Designer: Connecting Components.

• Using Multiplexers

System Requirements



Operating System:










DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

System Requirements




• AutoCAD 2000,2002, 2003, 2004, 2005



• ORACLE 81, 9i





DatabasesSupported:



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



Prior to starting FOUNDATION Fieldbus, a project must be created. A project has been provided for your convenience. You will need to unzip this project onto the drive of your choice. The exercise below installs the project onto the C:\ drive.

Exercise: Installing the Training Project


2 Download the file AP_FV8i_FB.zip to your desktop.

3 Click Unzip.

The file is extracted to the root directory of the C drive (C:\).

4 Click Close.

5 Open the Windows Start menu.

6 Select Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Project Tools > Project Administrator.


The Browse for Folder dialog opens.

Note: You cannot create a project root directory under a project directory. Therefore, in order for this option to be available in the File menu, you must select something at the primary root level of the navigation tree.


9 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Features


Composite Drawings

The different types of Fieldbus Segment templates included in the software are illustrated by the four composite drawings below. You will become more familiar with these drawings as the training progresses. Composite drawings now bring the best of both worlds from previous versions, consisting of both Template and Auto generation. Merging the AutoGEN and Template together was our initiative to save both template numbers and variations within network/segment design.

Double Brick with External Terminator.dwg (Generated Drawing shown below)


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Double Brick with Internal Terminator.dwg (Template)

Single Brick with External Terminator.dwg (Template)


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Network Topologies

Single Brick with Internal Terminator.dwg (Template)

Network Topologies

The functionality with Bentley Instrumentation and Wiring has been designed to support Daisy chain and tree topologies.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Terminology

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Terminology

Here are some common Fieldbus protocol terminologies to refer to throughout your training and onward progression with FOUNDATION Fieldbus (FF):

• Brick: a fully connectable passive junction located on the bus.

• Bus: an H1 Fieldbus cable between a host and field devices connected to multiple segments, sometimes through the use of repeaters.

• Deterministic: the ability to measure the maximum worst-case delay in delivery of a message between any two nodes in a network. Any network protocol that depends on random delays to resolve mastership is nondeterministic. Ethernet is sometimes commonly nondeterministic. If you have ever heard someone complaining their Internet bandwidth is horrible some days at home, that would mean a fluctuation in communication; there is no guarantee on the speed and transmitting of data in a consistent manor.

• Fieldbus: a digital, two-way, multi-drop communication link among intelligent measurement and control devices. It serves as a Local Area Network (LAN) for advanced process control, remote input/output and high speed factory automation applications.

• FF: Foundation Fieldbus

• FISCO: Fieldbus Intrinsic Safe Concept. Allows more power to an IS segment for approved FISCO devices, allowing for more devices per IS segment.

• H1: a Fieldbus network operating 31.25kbit/second.

• H1 Field Device: a Fieldbus device connected directly to an H1 Fieldbus. Typical H1 Field Devices are valves and transmitters.

• H1 Repeater: an active bus-powered or non-bus-powered device used to extend the range over which signals can be correctly transmitted and received for a given medium. A maximum of four repeaters and/or active couplers can be used between any two devices on an H1 Fieldbus network. Repeaters connect segments together to form larger networks.

• Coupler: a physical interface between a trunk and spur, or a trunk and a device.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Building a FOUNDATION
Fieldbus Segment
Module Overview
In this module you will build a new FOUNDATION Fieldbus segment.


• Working knowledge of FOUNDATION fieldbus Instrumentation design concepts.


Module Objectives


• Design a Fieldbus Instrument.

• Create an association to an instrument loop.

• Create an association to Fieldbus Segment.

Feb-10 245 Building a FOUNDATION Fieldbus Segment


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Building Fieldbus Components


In this module, you learn how to build and modify FOUNDATION Fieldbus segments and other components using the Instrumentation and Wiring interface. You also learn how to store these components as project standards, and create new FOUNDATION Fieldbus segments from the project standards.

For each component built in the Instrumentation and Wiring application, there are parameters which define the components. The most important parameter is the tag type. The tag type defines what type or class of component is being built.

There are many types of instruments. Examples include transmitters, control valves, flow elements, etc. A transmitter uses the tag type AT_INST_, whereas a control valve uses AT_CVALVE.

A new tag type for the FOUNDATION Fieldbus segment is AT_SEG_FF. The FOUNDATION Fieldbus segment tag within Instrumentation and Wiring is similar to the loop tag in that it defines the group of instruments, terminal strips and cables that make up the segment.

There are also new types of terminal strips. An instrument terminal strip uses the tag type AT_TSTRIP, but a landing terminal strip uses AT_LAND_TSTRIP. A new tag type for FOUNDATION Fieldbus is the AT_FB_BRICK which will be used for the brick/Megablock terminals.

The last tag type to be addressed is for the new FOUNDATION Fieldbus cabling. The cabling is separated into three types, the spur AT_SPUR, the splice AT_SPLICE and the trunk cable AT_TRUNK. These distinctions allow the users to easily sort, filter, and group the different cable types. Instrumentation and Wiring also uses the tag types to display the correct cables in specific views, reports and tabs within the interface.

Building a FOUNDATION Fieldbus Segment 246 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 1: Create a FOUNDATION Fieldbus Layout

1 Select Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Instrumentation from your Windows Start menu.

2 Select Layout Designer.

3 Click No.


5 Type Fieldbus Layout in the Description field.

6 Click Finish.

7 Close Layout Designer.

Feb-10 247 Building a FOUNDATION Fieldbus SegmentCopyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 2: Create Instruments

1 Ensure the Instrumentation List is active.



4 Click Next >.

5 Type 100-TIC-202 in the New INSTR field.

6 Click OK.

7 Click Finish.

The tag is created.

8 Repeat steps to create tags 100-TE-202, 100-TV-202 and 100-TY-202.


10 Click YES.

11 Click Generate Loop Numbers.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


A new Loop number is generated for the 100-T-202 tags.

12 Click OK.

Exercise 3: Create a New Fieldbus Segment

1 Select the Fieldbus tab from the Component Bar.

2 Select Fieldbus Segments.

3 Select Create New Bus Segments.

Note: The New Instrument Fieldbus Segment dialog presents five options: three for creating a new instrument fieldbus segment group, one for creating a new individual instrument tag and one for creating a new individual fieldbus segment tag.

4 Set the From Scratch radio button.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


5 Click Next >.

Note: The Document Template is disabled because the segment drawing is a panel based drawing, not a segment group based drawing.

6 Type Area 100 Fieldbus Instruments into the Service Description field.

7 Click Next >.

Note: The cable that is generated for a fieldbus segment instrument does not have the same tag types as those for regular Instrument cables.

Note: FOUNDATION Fieldbus instruments are connected to the bus segment through a length of cable called a SPUR. A spur can vary in length from 3.28ft (1m) to 394 ft. (120m). Instrumentation and Wiring uses the tag type AT_SPUR to indicate that a cable is a fieldbus spur cable and not a regular instrument cable.

Note: A spur that is less than 3.28ft (1m) in length is called a SPLICE. Instrumentation and Wiring uses the tag type AT_SPLICE to indicate that a cable is a fieldbus splice cable.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


8 Click Next >.

9 Change the Tag Code to N.

10 Type SEGMENT1 in the New Instrument Fieldbus Segment - Step 3 field.

11 Click OK.

12 Type 100-TT-202 in the New Instr - Step 3 field.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


13 Click OK.

14 Click Finish.

The New Fieldbus Segment dialog opens with the All tab selected. It shows that a segment tag, instrument tag, terminal strip tag, and cable tag have been created. Although these components have a tag number allocated in the database, the details for each have not been defined.

The All tab displays the contents of the segment, including the tag types for each component. The Segment, Instr, Tstrip, Spur/Splice, and Doc tabs display only components of that tag type. The properties for the selected components are listed in the window along the right-hand side of the dialog.

Notice the Auto Rename check boxes in the left-hand pane. If this segment is saved as a standard and used as a template in creating future segments, the components of the new segments will automatically inherit new tag numbers for the components that have the Auto Rename check box set. Additionally, if you change the name of the current segment within this dialog, then all components of the loop will be automatically renamed if the tag component parts match.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


To place a check in the Auto Rename check box, you must select the item in the list and then click Setup. From the Tag Attributes dialog you and change the value for the check box. You can also place a check mark next to the component under its specific tab. For example check instrument components while the Instr tab is selected.

Within the Standards group box there are two buttons, Build From and Save As. The Build From button is used to select a standard from which the current segment will be defined. The Save As button will save the current segment configuration as a standard to be used again.

Within the Tags group box there are five buttons: New, Edit, Delete, Remove and Setup. The New button will create a new tag within the loop, the Edit button will allow you to edit the tag, the Delete button will delete the selected tag from the project database, the Remove button will remove the tag from the segment but not delete from the tag from the database, and the Setup button will allow you to change the properties of the tag.

The Design button will allow a user to design the terminal strip or the cable for the segment and finally the Property View Options dialog will allow user to change the fields listed in the properties window as shown below.

15 Click Cancel.

The dialog closes.


17 Type Temperature Transmitter in the Description field of the Properties window.

18 Select BUS_AI in the I/O Type field.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


19 Select the Segment Symbol field browse button.

20 Set the Imperial radio button.

21 Select Segment Inst block.dwg in the Files list.

22 Click OK.

Exercise 4: Design the Instrument Terminal Strip


2 Select 100-TT-202.

3 Click Design.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


4 Click Add.

The Add Terminal Set dialog enables you to add new connection rows to the current Tstrip. The Terminal window allows you to define the number of individual terminals to be included in the new terminal set. The Repeat window allows you to type the number of repeated connection rows to be inserted into the current Tstrip in this field, or use the spinner button to select the appropriate value.

Note: A row refers to an individual terminal and a row set refers to a group of rows that are wired for one function. For example, a powered instrument would have a row set of 3 rows for the powered cable and a row set of 3 rows for the instrument cable. The row set definitions are critical for building a loop in the Detail Connection Window and auto-generated loops.

To select from a list of pre-defined standard row sets, click Build From to display the Build From Standard Terminal Set dialog. To save the current row set details as a standard which can be used as a template in building new row sets, click Save As to display the Save as Standard Terminal Set dialog. To copy the current row set terminal, click Copy. To clone the current row set terminals, click Clone. To remove a row set from the current Tstrip, place your cursor within the appropriate row, then click Delete. After you are finished defining the details of the new connection set, click OK to add the new terminals to the current Tstrip, or click Cancel to abort the new terminal set insertion process. The Links toolbar enables you to place graphical representations (no associated database information) of links, fuses, and linked terminals.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


7 Click Build From.

This dialog enables you to select pre-defined terminal combinations.

8 Select AI from the list near the top of the dialog.

The selections are filtered to display only analog inputs.

9 Select +,- (with SCR Tied Back).

10 Click OK.

Note: The + and - have been added to the Term column. Also, the tie back symbol in row 3, column 3 indicates that the SCR has been tied back.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


11 Click OK.

12 Click OK.

The Edit Fieldbus Segment dialog is returned.

Exercise 5: Design the Instrument Cable

1 Select the Spur/Splice tab.

2 Select cable tag 100-TT-202.

3 Click Design.

The New Spurs/Splice dialog displays conductor/core details of the cable, and provides tools for modifying the composition of the cable. To select a cable type from the cable catalog, select the manufacturer of the cable from the Cable Manufacturer list, then select the cable type from the Cable Type list.

Note: A core refers to an individual wire and a core set refers to a three strand cable containing a hot, neutral and ground. The core set definitions are


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


critical for terminations within a loop in the Detail Connection Window and auto-generated loops.

To create a new core set, click Add to display the Add Core Set dialog. To edit the details of an existing core set, click Edit to display the Edit Core Set dialog. To insert a new core set, place your cursor where you want to insert the new core set, and then click Insert to display the Insert Core Set dialog. To remove cable cores or a core set from the current cable, click Delete to display the Delete Core(s) dialog. To save the current cable details as a project standard, click Save As Standard; the Save Cable Type As dialog displays.

4 Since no cable cores have been defined, click Add from the Core Set group box.

The Add Core Set dialog enables you to add new cable cores to the current cable. Use the Core spinner button to indicate the number of individual cores to be included in the new Core Set. In the Repeat window type the number of repeated cores to be inserted into the current cable in this field, or use the spinner button to select the appropriate value. To copy the current core set terminal, click Copy. To remove a core set from the current cable, place your cursor within the appropriate row, and then click Delete. After you are finished defining the details of the new core set, click OK to add the new cores to the current cable, or click Cancel to abort the new core set insertion process.



The Cores are created.

7 Type WH in the first row of the Core column.

8 Type BK in the second row of the Core column.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


9 Type SHD in the third row of the Core column.

10 Click OK.

The New Cable dialog is returned.

11 Click OK.

The New Loop dialog is returned.

12 Click OK.

The FOUNDATION Fieldbus segment data is saved and Layout Designer is returned.

Exercise 6: Associate Instruments to a Fieldbus Segment


2 Select Instruments.

3 Select instrument 100-TY-202.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Note: Only instruments directly connected to the brick are made part of the segment. The remaining instruments will be part of the loop.

4 Select Associate.

Note: The dialog shows how many instruments will be associated with the Loop, Segment or Panel as <Count: 4>.

5 Set the Segments radio button.

6 Select SEGMENT1.

7 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


8 Select the Fieldbus tab.


10 Select SEGMENT1.

11 Click Edit.

The dialog opens showing the 2 instrument tags.

Exercise 7: Design the Instrument

1 Select the Instr Tab.

2 Set the Auto Rename check box for instrument 100-TT-202.

3 Select instrument 100-TY-202.

4 Select BUS_AO from the I/O field.

5 Select Segment Inst Block.dwg from the Segment Symbol field.

Exercise 8: Design the Tstrips


2 Click New.

3 Click OK.

The defaults are accepted.

4 Type 100-TY-202 in the New TSTRIP field.

5 Click OK.

6 Select 100-TY-202.

7 Click Design.

8 Design the instrument terminal strip with 1 row set of 3 terminals labeled +, -, (screen tied back).


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


9 Click Save As.

The terminal strip design is saved as the project standard.

10 Select BUS* from I/O drop-down.

11 Enter +,-,S in the Name field as shown below.

12 Click OK.

To accept the terminals.

13 Click OK.

14 Click OK.

The EDIT Fieldbus Segment dialog is returned.

Exercise 9: Design the Spurs



3 Select the spur 100-TY-202.

4 Click Design.

5 Design the spur with 1 row set of 3 cores labeled WH, BK, GY.

6 Click OK.

7 Click Save as Standard.

8 Type Belden in the Manufacturer field.

9 Type Fieldbus Cable in the Cable Type field.

10 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The following updates are made to the Edit Spur/Splice dialog.

11 Click OK.

12 Select 100-TY-202 from the Source field in the Spur/Splice Properties window.



15 Select 100-TY-202.

16 Select 100-TY-202 from the Tstrip field in the Instr Properties window.

17 Click Save.

18 Click OK.

The EDIT Fieldbus Segment dialog closes.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 10: Assign the Terminal Strips to the Instruments

1 Drag and drop SEGMENT1 onto the layout.

Note: The cable tag graphics are green. From the following chart, determine what the individual component colors represent.

2 Select 100-TT-202 on the layout.


Component Color

Definition of Connections

Red No Connections

Green Source Connected, Destination Unknown

Purple Source and Destination Known, No Connections Made

Blue Source and Destination Known, Source Connected

Yellow Source Disconnected

Grey Connected to Component on Different Layout

Black Source and Destination Connected

Cyan Source Known, Destination Unknown, Source not Connected


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The core terminations are verified.

Note: Color shown on the graphic may not correspond to the colors on your machine.

4 Close the dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review

Now that you have completed this module, let's review what you have learned.

Questions

1 What does the green color represent on the layout?

2 Why did you save the cable configuration as a standard?

Answers

1 The green color indicates that the core is connected to its source but does not know its destination.

2 The cable configuration was saved as a standard to save time when designing additional cores.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Building FOUNDATION
Fieldbus Panels
Module Overview
In this module you learn how to build and modify FOUNDATION fieldbus panels using the Bentley Instrumentation and Wiring interface.

The FOUNDATION fieldbus panel will house the segment Brick or Megablock, plus associated terminals strips.

You also learn how to store these components as project standards, which can be used as templates when building future FOUNDATION fieldbus panels.




Module Objectives


• Create a fieldbus panel.

• Design Bricks/Megablocks and Tstrips in the fieldbus panel.

• Design the internal cables for the fieldbus panel and segment trunk cables.

• Add and connect segment terminators inside the fieldbus panel.

• Save the fieldbus panel as a standard.

• Create a new fieldbus panel from a standard.

Feb-10 267 Building FOUNDATION Fieldbus Panels


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Building Fieldbus Panels


Building a Fieldbus Panel with a Single Brick and No Terminator

In this section you learn to create a new fieldbus panel, design terminal strips and Bricks/Megablocks within the panel, and design the multi-core cables and trunk cables that connect them. The document application type used by fieldbus panels is a new feature in I&W called composite drawings. Composite drawings are half template-based (using tokens) and half auto-generated. One part of the drawing remains graphically static, with only the data changing as it would in a template. The other part of the drawing is re-created from scratch and the symbols are inserted each time the drawing is regenerated.

During the creation of the bricks, terminal strips, and devices you will be introduced to new fields in each component’s Properties Window that direct the software on how to generate the drawing. To explain, we must first go back in time to when the spread-sheet column theory was introduced. The table below explains how the templates are divided into columns by alpha character.

This configuration handles a majority of the instrumentation schemes. If necessary, additional columns can be used in order to support even more complicated schemes. The following diagram shows a typical instrument

Loop Columns Field Columns Card Columns

A B I J K W X Y Z

Tag Number

Local Junction Box

Secondary Junction Box

Primary Junction Box

Marshalling Strip

CB, Relay or Barrier

Card Terminal Strip

Card Terminals

Card Address

Building FOUNDATION Fieldbus Panels 268 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


configuration and how each of the components fit into this spreadsheet-type view.

Two new properties have been created for bricks, terminals strips and devices. These are ConPos Type (Connection Position Type) and Connection Position.

ConPos Type can be either Dynamic (default) or Fixed. Connection Position can be A to Z as shown above.

If the ConPos Type is set to Dynamic, then the Connection Position individual terminals on a brick, terminal strip or device can change automatically depending on how many levels of connections are made. For example, if an instrument is connected directly onto a junction box terminal strip, the instrument terminals would be on connection position A and the connected junction box terminals would be on connection position B, i.e. the next connection position from left to right. If the designer then introduced a new junction box in-between the original instrument and the original junction box, the new connected junction box terminals would be on connection position B and the original connected junction box terminals would dynamically move along one connection position to C. This method of working is perfectly acceptable for relatively simple control networks. However, if you are attempting to model more complicated control networks (with varying levels of interposing panels), you can end up with different terminals, on the same terminal strip, on different connection positions. This can make the layout of templates tricky.

If you set the ConPos Type to Fixed for a brick, terminal strip or device, the terminals associated to that brick, terminal strip or device are locked to the specified connection position irrespective of how many levels of connections come before them. In the example above, the primary Junction Box terminal strip

Feb-10 269 Building FOUNDATION Fieldbus PanelsCopyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


is fixed to connection position J. By specifying connection position J, the designer has 9 connection positions to place/connect instruments and interposing panels (A to I) to the left of the primary junction box. One benefit of this is that the layout of the templates is made simpler as all the tokens relating to the primary junction box terminals use the connection position of J.

These new concepts will become clearer as you work through the following exercises and fix bricks, terminal strips and devices to different connection positions.

Exercise 1: Create a New Field Panel

1 Select Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Instrumentation from your Windows Start menu.

Instrumentation & Wiring launches.



4 Select Fieldbus Panels.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


7 Click Next >.

8 Select Single Brick with External Terminator.dwg from the Drawing Template list.

9 Type Area 100 Fieldbus Panel in the Fieldbus Panel Remarks field.

10 Click Next >.

11 Click Next >.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


12 Type 100-FBP-100 in the New Field Panel - Step 3 field.

13 Click OK.

14 Click Finish.

The New Fieldbus Panel dialog is very similar to the New Fieldbus Segment dialog except for the tabs. All of the buttons along the bottom of the dialog operate just as in the New Fieldbus Segment dialog detailed in the previous module. The Dev tab is used in the Fieldbus Panels and Card Panel dialogs for devices such as relays, I.S. barriers and segment terminators to be tagged and designed. The New Fieldbus Panel dialog defaults to display the All tab, which shows that a tag was created for the junction box, terminal strip, cable and document.

Exercise 2: Design a Brick/Megablock in a Field Panel

Two terminal strips will be designed in this section. Terminal strip 100 was created with the panel and will be used for the brick. The second terminal strip to be created will be the marshalling strip to marshal the brick signals into a multi-core cable. The brick will be the landing point for the incoming


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


instrument spurs. The brick contains 14 ports, 12 ports for instrument signals and 2 ports for the trunk cables into and out of the brick.

1 Select the Tstrip/Brick tab.

2 Select 100.

3 Click Edit.

4 Type BRICK-100 in the Edit TSTRIP field.

5 Click OK.

6 Change the Brick ConPos. Type field to Fixed.

7 Set Brick Connection Position to J.

8 Click YES.

9 Click Design.

The Edit TSTRIP[Brick-100] dialog displays.

10 Click Add.



13 Type 1+, 1S, 1-.

14 Click OK.

Note: Unlike most terminal strips, the Brick/Megablock will be labeled Ports instead of Tsets. There are two extra ports added to each brick, one to connect the trunk cable and the other to connect bricks together.

15 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The new terminal strip is generated.

16 Place your cursor in Tset13.

17 Click Edit.

18 Select the label field Port 13.

19 Type Trunk Out.

20 Edit terminals to Out+, Out S and Out-.

21 Click OK.

22 Place your cursor in Tset14.

23 Click Edit.

24 Select the label field Port 14.

25 Type Trunk In.

26 Edit terminals to In+, In S and In-.

27 Click OK.

28 Click OK.

29 Click OK.

The New Fieldbus Panel dialog displays.

30 Click Yes, if prompted.

31 Click Save As in the Tstrip/Brick window.

32 Type 12 Port Brick in the Tstrip field.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


33 Click OK.

34 Click Build From.

Note: This verifies that the Brick was stored. The 12 Port Brick is listed as a standard.

35 Click Cancel.

Exercise 3: Design an Internal Terminal Strip

The next step is to create a small marshalling tstrip inside the fieldbus panel. This tstrip can be used to marshal the signals from multiple segment bricks and carry them back to the control system via a single multi-core cable.

As an example, the fieldbus panel could contain 5 bricks with 12 instruments connected to each. All 60 signals could be marshaled within the fieldbus panel and carried back to the control system via a 5-pair cable.

1 Ensure the Tstrip/Brick tab is still selected.

2 Click New.

3 Select AT_TSTRIP as the Tag Type and Tag Code N.

4 Click OK.

5 Type TS-1 in the New TSTRIP dialog.

6 Click OK.

7 Design TS-1 as shown below.

8 Click OK.

The terminal strip is generated.

9 Click OK.

The New Fieldbus Panel dialog is returned.

10 Change the Brick Connection Position Type field to Fixed.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


11 Select Brick Connection Position to K.

12 Click Yes, if prompted.

13 Select Save.

Exercise 4: Create a New Device


2 Click New.

3 Select AT_DEVICE in the Device Tag Types list.

4 Select N in the Tag Codes list.

5 Click OK.

6 Type T1 in the New Device dialog.

7 Click OK.

8 Type TERMINATOR in the Type field of the Properties Window.

9 Select Yes in the Internal Terminator field.

10 Set the Terminator State to On.

11 Select Fixed in the Connection Position Type field.

12 Set Connection Position to I.

13 Click Design.

14 Add two terminals on the left.

15 Add three terminals on the right.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


16 Edit the terminal numbers as shown below.

17 Click Connect.

18 Click Yes.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


19 Connect the terminator as shown below.

20 Click OK.

21 Click Yes.

The New Fieldbus Panel dialog is returned.

22 Click Save.

Exercise 5: Design a Multi-Core Trunk Cable

The trunk cable will be used to carry multiple bus instrument signals back to the DCS.

1 Select the Cable/Trunk tab.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


2 Select 100.

3 Click Edit.

4 Type 100FBP100 in the Edit Cable field.

5 Click OK.

6 Click Design.

The Edit Cable dialog displays.

7 Click Add from the Core Set group box.

The Add Core Set dialog displays.


9 Type WHT for the first core in the Core field.

10 Type BLK for the second core.

11 Type SHD for the third core.

12 Click OK.

The Edit Cable dialog displays.

13 Click Save As Standard.

14 Type Belden in the Manufacturer field.

15 Type Trunk Cable in the Cable Type field.

16 Click OK.

17 Select TS-1.

18 Design the cable using the standard created above.

19 Select Yes in the Internal Cable field of the Cable/Trunk Properties window.

Note: An internal cable is a cable to be used within the field panel only.

20 Click New.

21 Make the selections shown below.

22 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


23 Tag the new cable T1.

24 Label the cores OR, BL and SHD.

25 Select Yes in the Internal Cable field of the Cable/Trunk Properties window.

26 Select Save.

Exercise 6: Set the Segment Drawing Properties


2 Set the Doc Properties as follows:

3 Select Brick-100 from the Print Range list.

4 Click OK.

The Select Print Range dialog closes.

Exercise 7: Save the Panel as a Standard

1 Select Save.


3 Set the Auto Rename check boxes for the components.

4 Select the Cable/Trunk tab.






DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The dialog should look as follows:

9 Click Save As.

10 Type Single Brick with External Termination FB Panel in the Fieldbus Panel field.

11 Click OK.

12 Click OK.

The EDIT Fieldbus Panel dialog is closed and all information is saved.

Exercise 8: Connect the Internal Panel Cable in the Fieldbus Panel

The last step in designing the panel is to connect the internal cable wiring.




4 Drag and drop 100-FBP-100 onto the layout to the right of the instruments.

5 Select the panel.

6 Select Connect Internal Panel Cables from the context menu.

7 Select BRICK-100 in the Source window.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


8 Select TS-1 in the Destination window.

9 Connect TS-1 WHT to BRICK-100 In+.

10 Connect TS-1 BLK to BRICK-100 In- .

11 Connect TS-1 SHD to BRICK-100 In S.

12 Save the connections.

13 Select T1 from the Internal Cable list.

14 Select T1 from the Tstrip list.

15 Make the connections as shown.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


16 Select Save.

17 Select Swap Source/Destination.

18 Select TS-1 from the Internal Cable list.

19 Select TS-1 from the destination Tstrip list.

20 Connect as shown.

21 Select Save.

22 Select T1 from the Internal Cable list.

23 Select BRICK-100 from the Tstrip list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


24 Make the connection as shown.

25 Select Save.


27 Select Fieldbus Spurs/Cables.

28 Drag and drop cable 100FBP100 onto the layout to the right of panel 100-FBP-100.

29 Right-click on the graphic of the cable.

30 Click Connect to the Connect Cable dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


31 Select TS-1 in the Source Tstrip field.

32 Connect cable 100FBP100 to TSet 1 of TS-1.

33 Select Save.

34 Close the connection dialog.

Exercise 9: Build a Marshalling Panel



3 Select New Tag.

You will now build the new panel from scratch, accepting the defaults.

4 Type Area 100 Marshalling Panel in the Field Panel Remarks field.

5 Tag the panel 100-FMP-100.


7 Edit the terminal strip.

8 Tag the terminal strip 100-TS-100.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



10 Click OK.

The terminal strip is generated.

11 Click OK.

The New Field Panel dialog is returned.

12 Change the Connection Position Type field to Fixed.

13 Select Connection Position to M.


15 Type BUS in the Cable Application field in the Cable Properties window.

16 Click Setup.

17 Change the Cable Tag Type to AT_TRUNK.

18 Design the cable from the project standard Belden/Trunk Cable.

19 Click OK.

The cable is generated and the New Field Panel dialog is returned.

20 Click OK.

The marshalling panel is saved.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


21 Drag and drop panel and trunk 100-FMP-100 onto the Fieldbus Layout to the right of the Fieldbus panel 100-FBP-100.

22 Connect the cores of 100-FMP-100 to the panel terminal strip as shown below.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review


Questions

1 When connecting the internal cables of 100-FBP-100, why did you have to connect the individual cores?

2 What does the Swap Source/Destination icon do?

Answers

1 The cores had to be connected individually because the terminals were in different configurations and could not be connected directly.

2 The Swap Source/Destination icon will switch the source and destination windows in the connection dialog so that the user does not have to close and re-open the dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Building I/O Card Panels for H1
Cards
Module Overview
In this module you learn how to build and modify I/O card panels using the Bentley Instrumentation and Wiring that house FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 cards. You also learn how to store these card panels as project standards, which can be used as templates in building future card panels.




Module Objectives




• Design the H1 card.

• Add a new H1 card to the existing panel.

Feb-10 289 Building I/O Card Panels for H1 Cards


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating New I/O Card Panels


In this section you learn to create an I/O card panel from scratch. The panel will contain two Foundation Fieldbus H1 cards. H1 is a term used to describe a fieldbus network operating at 31.25 kbit/second.

The H1 cards will use a new tag type called AT_FF_CRD. The first card created will be designated the primary card for the fieldbus network and the second will be designated the backup card, therefore providing redundancy to the network.

Each H1 card will be designed with four Ports to allocate segments and instrument signals to.

You will add two new devices called power conditioners. A power conditioner is used to connect a conventional power source to a Fieldbus segment. The power conditioners will be connected to the H1 cards via internal panel cables. If the power conditioner is isolated this protects against communication errors resulting from crosstalk between fieldbus segments and more than one earth fault resulting in the failure of segments.

Power conditioners can be isolated or non-isolated and can monitor the power supply and segment operation and generate an alarm in case of failure.

Exercise 1: Create a New I/O Card Panel

3 Select Layout Designer, if not already open.


Note: It does not matter if you create the card panel in the Instrumentation tab or the Fieldbus tab.

5 Select Card Panels.

Building I/O Card Panels for H1 Cards 290 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


6 Select New tag.


8 Click Next >.

9 Select AT_CRD_PANEL in the Card Panel Tag Type list.

10 Select A-T-N in the Tag Code list.

11 Click No.

12 Type Area 100 PCS Panel in the Card Panel Remarks field.

Feb-10 291 Building I/O Card Panels for H1 CardsCopyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


13 Click Next >.

14 Select AT_FF_CRD in the Card Tag Type list.

15 Select R-N in the Tag Code list.

16 Set the H1 Card check box.

Note: You must select the H1 Card check box to design the card with Ports instead of channels as per regular I/O cards.

17 Ensure that the Also Create Card Tstrip check box is selected.

18 Select AT_CRD_TSTRIP in the Tstrip Tag Type list.

19 Select R-N in the Tag Code list.

20 Ensure that the Also Create Card Cable check box is cleared.

21 Click Next >.

22 Type 100-PCS-100 in the Panelnum field.

The PCS panel tag number is defined as 100-PCS-100.

23 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


24 Type R1-S3 in the New Card Panel - Step 3 field.

25 Click OK.

26 Click Finish.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Designing the H1 Card


In this section, you learn how to define the parameters of the H1 card in the Properties window and design the termination points.

Exercise 1: Design the Primary H1 Card


2 Select card R1-S3.

3 Select the browse button in the Card Type field.

4 Click Copy.

5 Type CC-PFB401.

6 Click OK.

7 Type BUS* in the IO_TYPE field.

8 Type 4 in the CHANNELS field.

9 Type Honeywell in the MANUFACTR field.

10 Type Series C FIM in the DESCRIPT field.

11 Type 220V AC in the SPPLYVOLTS field.

12 Click OK.

13 Select CC-PFB401 from the Card Type list.

14 Select BUS* in the I/O field of the Card Properties window.

15 Select Primary in the Redundancy field.

16 Type C1 for Controller.

17 Type N1 for Node.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


18 Select Card Tag R1-S3.

19 Click Design.

20 Set the Ports to 4 in the lower left corner of the Edit Ports dialog.

21 Click Add.

Note: Four ports should now display for the new H1 card. You can edit the IP Address, Description, Comments etc. in this dialog. Allocation of segments and network can also be made via this dialog.

22 Click OK.

The New Card Panel dialog is returned.

Exercise 2: Create the Backup H1 Card

1 Verify that the Card tab is still active.

2 Click New.

3 Select R-N in the Tag Codes field for Card Tag Types.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


4 Select R-N in the Tag Codes field for Tstrip Tag Types.

5 Click OK.

6 Tag the new card R1-S4.

7 Click OK.

8 Select R1-S4.

9 Select CC-PFB401 from the Card Type list.

10 Select BUS* in the I/O field of the Card Properties window.

11 Select Secondary from the Redundancy list.

12 Type C1 for Controller.

13 Type N1 for Node.

14 Select the Card Tag R1-S4.

15 Click Design.

16 Ensure that the I/O Type of BUS* is selected in the list at the top of the Edit Ports dialog.

17 Set the Ports to 4 in the lower left corner of the Edit Ports dialog.

18 Click Add.

19 Click OK.

Exercise 3: Designate the Backup H1 Card

1 Select R1-S3 in the Card tab window.

2 Select R1-S4 from the Backup Card list in the Properties window.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Designing the H1 Card Terminal Strips


Exercise 1: Design the Primary Card Terminal Strip


2 Select tstrip R1-S3.


4 Select S in the Connection Position field.

5 Click Design.

6 Click Add.

7 Click OK.

The New Card Panel dialog is returned, and the Connection Position Propagation message displays.

8 Click OK.

9 Select R1-S4.

10 Repeat steps 3 through 8 to design the terminal strip for the secondary card.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Note: The Connection Position Type and Connection Position will be identical for each terminal strip.

11 Create a new Tstrip with a Tag Type of AT_TSTRIP and Tag Code of N.

12 Tag the new strip EARTHBAR.


14 Click OK.

The New Card Panel dialog is returned.


16 Select F in the Connection Position field.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating the Power Conditioners


A power conditioner is a device in the card panel. The cable connecting the power conditioner to the H1 card performs a dual function. It provides both power to the network and carries the communication signals to the H1 card.

Exercise 1: Create a Power Conditioner


2 Click New.

3 Select AT_DEVICE and N from the Setup New Device Tag Type dialog.

4 Click OK.

5 Type PC1 in the New Device dialog.

6 Click OK.

7 Select POWER CONDITIONER in the Type field.

8 Select Yes in the Internal Terminator field.

9 Select On in the Terminator State field.


11 Select N in the Connection Position field

12 Click Design.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


13 Design PC1 as shown below.

14 Click Connect.

15 Make the connections as shown.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


16 Click OK.

17 Click Yes.

Exercise 2: Create a New Power Conditioner Cable


2 Click New.

The Setup New Cable Tag Type dialog displays.

3 Select AT_CABLE as the Cable Tag Type.

4 Select T-N as the Tag Code.

5 Click OK.

6 Type PCS-R1S3 in the New Cable field..

7 Click OK.

8 Change the Cable Application from INSTR to BUS.

9 Select 100-PCS-100 from the Source field list in the Properties window.

Note: This cable is connecting components inside the I/O Card panel 100-PCS-100.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


10 Select Yes in the Internal Cable field.

11 Click Design.

12 Design the cable using the Belden/Trunk Cable standard.

13 Click OK.

The New Cable dialog is returned.

14 Click OK.

15 Click OK.

The panel and its components are saved.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 3: Connect the Internal Cables

1 Drag and drop card panel 100-PCS-100 onto the layout to the right of the marshalling panel 100-FMP-100.

2 Right-click on the graphic.

3 Select Connect Internal Panel Cables.

4 Connect cable PCS-R1S3 to terminal strip PC1 as shown below.

5 Click Swap Source/Destination.

6 Select R1-S3 in the Destination window.

7 Connect as shown below.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


8 Change the Destination Tstrip to EARTHBAR.

9 Click Yes.

The previous connection is saved.

10 Connect the SHD of cable PCS-R1S3 to GND 1 of EARTHBAR.


The connections are saved.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review


Questions

1 What is the reason to make a primary and secondary card?

2 What is the purpose of the Power Conditioner?

Answers

1 In case of a failure of the primary card, the secondary card will be used.

2 The Power Conditioner provides power to the network and carries the communication signals to the H1 card.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Layout Designer: Connecting
Components
Module Overview
In this module, you will complete the connection of the fieldbus components on the layout.




Module Objectives



Feb-10 307 Layout Designer: Connecting Components


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



Exercise 1: Connect Instruments to the Field Panel

1 Select Layout Designer if not already open.

2 Select the 100-TT-202 cable graphic.

3 Click and hold the blue connection node, located in the center of the graphic.

4 Drag the line to the fieldbus panel (100-FBP-100) graphic.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The cable color code is now blue, which indicates the cable knows its source and destination but only the source is connected.

5 Connect 100-TY-202 in the same manner.

6 Right-click on the right side of cable 100-TT-202.

The context menu displays.

7 Select Connect Cores in Panel 100-FBP-100.

8 Connect the individual cores as shown above.

9 Close the dialog.

10 Save the changes.

The cable color code is now black, indicating that the connections are complete.

11 Connect 100-TY-202 in the same manner using TSet 2.

12 Select 100-TT-202.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The Loop Connections dialog displays all connections for the current loop.

Note: The Detail Connection Window provides a useful means of ensuring connections are correct.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 2: Connect the Fieldbus Panel to the Marshalling Panel

1 Select the cable graphic 100-FBP-100.

2 Drag the graphic line to marshalling panel 100-FMP-100.



4 Select Connect Cores in Panel: 100-FMP-100.

The Connect Destination Cores For Cable [100-FBP-100] dialog displays.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 3: Connect the Marshalling Panel to the Card Panel

1 Select the cable graphic 100-FMP-100.

2 Drag the graphic line to card panel 100-PCS-100.



4 Select Connect Cores in Panel: 100-PCS-100.

The Connect Destination Cores For Cable [100-FMP-100] dialog displays.

5 Select PC1 in the Destination Tstrip list.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



8 Click Yes.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Document

Creating a Document

Exercise 1: Create a Document

1 Select the Fieldbus panel 100-FBP-100 on the layout.


3 Select 100-FBP-100.

4 Select Document Properties.

5 Verify the Doc Application, Type and Template.

6 Set the Print Range to BRICK-100.

7 Click OK.

8 Select Regenerate/Save Document.

A progress bar appears as the tokens update.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Document

9 Select View Document.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review


Questions

1 Why did you have to connect the individual cores when connecting the instruments to the brick?

2 Can you connect cores to more than one terminal strip?

Answers

1 The connection of the individual cores allows you to connect the positive and negative cores when they are in different arrangements.

2 You can connect cores to different terminal strips within the same panel.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Using a Multiplexer in a
Segment
Module Overview
This chapter focuses on the usage of multiplexers in fieldbus segments. Multiplexers reduces the cost of installing hazardous area cabling, saves installation time and space. For multiplexers a new tag type AT_MUX is available and for multiplexer terminal strips a new tag type AT_MUX_TSTRIP.




Module Objectives


• Design a segment with a multiplexer.

• Design a new fieldbus panel.

• Create a multi-core cable for a marshalling panel .

• Create a new power conditioner in the existing card panel for new segment.

• Generate a document for a segment with a multiplexer.

Feb-10 317 Using a Multiplexer in a Segment


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Designing a New Segment with Multiplexer


Exercise 1: Creating a New Segment


4 Select Layout > New Layout.

5 Type Multiplexer Example in the Description field.

6 Click Finish.



9 Click Create New Bus Segments.

10 Set From Scratch radio button on New Instrument Fieldbus Segment - Step 1 dialog.

11 Click Next.

12 On the New Instrument Fieldbus Segment - Step 2 dialog select N as the tag type.

13 Click No.

Note: The tag code is for this segment only, not for all tags.

14 Click Next.

Using a Multiplexer in a Segment 318 Feb-10Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


15 Select the Tag Codes as shown below.

16 Click Next.

17 Type PCS1NWT7 in the New Instrument Fieldbus Segment - Step3 field.

18 Click OK.

19 Type 100-PIT-31291 in the New Instr - Step 3 field.

Feb-10 319 Using a Multiplexer in a SegmentCopyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


20 Click OK.

21 Click Finish on New Instrument Fieldbus Segment - Step 5 dialog.

On New Fieldbus Segment dialog you will have one instrument tag, one spur, one terminal strip and Segment tag.

Exercise 2: Creating the Instrument Tags


2 Enter following properties for the Instrument tag.

I/O BUS_AI

Description PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

Manufacturer ACME

MODEL ACPT1


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



4 Click Design.

To design the terminal strip.

5 Click Add.

To add terminal sets as shown.

6 Click OK.

To close the Add Terminal Set dialog.

7 Click OK.

Service Tank 23 Pressure

Segment Symbol Segment Inst Block.dwg

DCS Keyword BBB

Memory Address 1001001

Data Type AAA

Set Point 2222

Characterization CCC

I/O BUS_AI


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


To accept the design of the terminal strip.


9 Select BELDEN from the Cable Manufacturer list.

10 Select FIELDBUS CABLE from the Cable Type list.

11 Click OK.


13 Create two new instrument tags using tag type AT_INST_, tag code A-T-N and having Tstrips and Spurs.

14 The tag numbers and properties are shown below:

Tag No 100-LV-31291 100-LV-31292

I/O BUS_AO BUS_AO

Description LEVEL VALVE LEVEL VALVE

Manufacturer ACME ACME


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


15 For instruments 100-LV-31291, 100-LV-31292, and 100-LIT-31291 design the terminal strip having one terminal set with three terminals +, -, Scr.

Refer to graphic in step 5.

Model ACLV1 ACLV1

Service Tank 23 LEVEL Tank 24 LEVEL

Segment Symbol Segment Inst Block.dwg Segment Inst Block.dwg

DCS Keyword BBB BBB

Memory Address 1001001 1001001

Data type AAA AAA

Set Point 2222 2222

Characterization CCC CCC

Tag No 100-DT-31291 100-LIT-31291

I/O BUS_AI BUS_AI

Description DENSITY TRANSMITTER LEVEL TRANSMITTER

Manufacturer ACME ACME

Model ACDT1 ACLT1

Service Fluid Density Tank 23 LEVEL

Segment Symbol Segment Inst Block.dwg Segment Inst Block.dwg

DCS Keyword BBB BBB

Memory Address 1001001 1001001

Data type AAA AAA

Set Point 2222 2222

Characterization CCC CCC

Tag No 100-LV-31291 100-LV-31292


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


16 For instrument 100-DT-31291 the terminal strip design should look as shown below:

17 Click OK on the Edit Terminal Set dialog.

18 Click OK on Edit TSTRIP dialog.





22 Click Ok.

To close the Edit Splice/Spur dialog.


Exercise 3: Creating a Multiplexer Tag

1 Create another Instrument tag using tag type AT_MUX as shown:

2 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


3 Type 100-MUX-31291 in the New INSTR field.

4 Assign following properties to the multiplexer as shown:

Note: Segment Symbol for MUX 4 Port Block.dwg is part of the sample dataset.


6 Click Design.

To design the terminal strip.

7 Click Add.

To add terminal sets as shown.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


8 Click OK.


9 Click OK on Edit TSTRIP dialog.


10 Select tag 100-MUX-31291.

11 In the Tstrip Properties, select B in the Connection Position list.




15 Click Ok.

To close the Edit Splice/Spur dialog.

16 Click OK on Fieldbus Segment dialog.

To save the Fieldbus Segment design and close the dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 4: Connecting the Multiplexer within Segment

1 Drag and drop new segment PCS1NWT7 on the layout Multiplexer Example.

2 Arrange the components on the layout as shown:

3 Connect the destination of cable 100-PIT-31291 to TSet 1 of 100-MUX-31291.

4 Save connections.

5 Close Connect Destination Cores dialog.

6 Connect 100-LV-31291 on TSet 2 of 100-MUX-31291.

7 Connect 100-LV-31292 on TSet 3 of 100-MUX-31291.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


8 Connect 100-DT-31291 on TSet 4 of 100-MUX-31291.

9 Finally the connections should look like figure shown below:

10 Save connections.


Note: The multiplexer cable has not been terminated on MUX terminal strip based on its green color.

12 Click on the line between the cable and the MUX.


The Connect Source Cores dialog opens.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


14 Connect cable 100-MUX-31291 on TSet 5 of 100-MUX-31291.



The Layout should look as shown:


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Designing a new FOUNDATION Fieldbus Panel


Exercise 1: Creating Fieldbus Panel with Brick and Trunk



2 Select Create New Bus Panels.

3 Set From Scratch.

4 Click Next.

5 Type Single Brick with Internal terminator and MUX in the Panel Remarks field.

6 Click Next.

7 Click Next.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


8 To accept the defaults.

9 Type 100-FBP-007 in the New Fieldbus Panel - Step 3 field.

10 Click OK.

11 Click Finish.

The New Fieldbus Panel dialog opens.

12 Click Save.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Note: When you save the New Fieldbus Panel dialog, the title will change to Edit Fieldbus Panel dialog.

Exercise 2: Design Brick


2 Select the Brick tag.

3 Click Edit from Tags group box.

4 Edit the tag from 007 to BRICK-007.

5 Click OK.

To accept the change.

6 Enter values for the Brick properties as shown below:

Description Tstrip/Brick Properties

Internal Terminator? Yes

Terminal State On

Brick ConPos Type Fixed

Brick Connection Position J

Manufacturer RELCOM

MODEL F215

Mounting Requirements 35mm DIN Rail


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


7 Click Design.

To launch Edit TSTRIP dialog.


The Add Terminal Set dialog opens.

9 Make changes as shown below:

Note: This configuration will design a 12 Port brick with an extra TSet for an Incoming trunk and an extra TSet for an Outgoing trunk making total of 14 Terminal sets.

10 Click OK.


11 Click OK.

Wiring Capacity CCC

Case Material Lexan Ploycarbonate

Description Tstrip/Brick Properties


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


12 Change labels for TSet 13 and Tset 14 and the terminal numbers as well, as shown below:

13 Click OK.

To save the Brick design and return to Edit Fieldbus Panel dialog

14 While in the Tstrip/Brick tab click New from Tags group box.

15 Create a new Tstrip with Tag type AT_TSTRIP and Tag Code T-N.

16 Clear the Create Cable checkbox.

17 Click OK.

18 Type TS-1 in the New Tstrip Number field on New TSTRIP dialog.

19 Click OK.

20 Select Fixed from the Connection Position Type list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


21 Select K from the Connection Position list.

22 Click Design and design the Tstrip as shown below.

23 Click OK.

To return to Edit Fieldbus Panel dialog.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 3: Designing Trunk

1 Select Cable\Trunk tab.

2 Select trunk 007.

3 Click Edit from Tags group box.

4 Type 100FBP007 in the Edit CABLE field.

5 Click OK.

6 Click Design.


8 Select TRUNK CABLE from the Cable Type list.

9 Click Ok.

To close the New Cable dialog.

10 In Cable\Trunk tab click New from Tags group box.

To create a new Cable.

11 Select AT_CABLE from the CABLE Tag Types list.

12 Select N from the Tag Codes list.

13 Type BRICK-007 in the New CABLE field.

14 Click OK.

15 Select Yes in the Internal Cable list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The properties of the new Cable should look as shown below:

16 Select cable BRICK-007.

17 Click Design.



20 Click Ok.

To close the New Cable dialog.

21 Click OK on Edit Fieldbus Panel dialog.

To Save the Fieldbus Panel design and close the dialog.

Note: The internal panel cable Brick-007 will connect between Brick-007 and Terminal Strip TS-1. Trunk Cable 100FBP007 will connect TS-1 to Marshalling Panel Terminal Strip


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 4: Making Internal Panel Connections for Fieldbus Panel

1 Drag and Drop Fieldbus Panel 100-FBP-007 on the Multiplexer Example layout.

2 Right-click on the Fieldbus Panel 100-FBP-007.

3 Select Connect Internal Panel Cables from the context menu.

4 In the Source window select BRICK-007.

5 In the Cable window select BRICK-007.

6 Connect cores as shown below on PORT IN (TSet 14).


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


7 Save connections.

8 Click Swap Source\Destination.

9 Connect cable cores on Destination side to TS-1 as shown below:




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Multi core cable for Marshalling Panel


Exercise 1: Creating a Multi core cable for Marshalling Panel 100-FMP-100

1 Drag and Drop Marshalling panel 100-FMP-100 on the layout.

2 Right-click on 100-FMP-100.

3 Select Edit Panel from the context menu.

4 In the Edit Field Panel dialog select the Cable tab.

5 Click New from Tags group box.

6 Type 100FMP100A in the New Cable tag field.

7 Select AT_TRUNK from the Cable Tag Types list.

8 Select N from the Tag Code List.

9 Click OK.

10 Select the Cable Properties as shown below:

11 Click Design.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


12 Design the cable as shown below:

13 Click OK.

To close the Add Core Set dialog

14 Click OK.

15 Click OK.

To save and close Edit Field Panel dialog

16 Drag and drop Card Panel 100-PCS-100 on the layout just next to Marshalling Panel 100-FMP-100.

17 Drag and drop new trunk cable 100FMP100A on the layout.

18 Select 100-FMP-100 as its Source.

19 Select 100-PCS-100 as its Destination.

20 Save and close the Connection dialog.

21 Right-click on the cable source link.

22 Select Connect Source in Panel.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


23 Connect TSet 3 of Tstrip 100-TS-100 to Cable Core Set 1 as shown below:




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Modifying the Card Panel


Exercise1: Create new Power Conditioner device in Card Panel

1 Select card panel 100-PCS-100 on the layout.

2 Right-click and select Edit Card Panel.


4 Click New from Tags group box.

5 Select AT_DEVICE from the Device Tag Types list.

6 Select N from the Tag Code list.

7 Click OK.

8 Type PC2 in the New Device field.

9 Select N from the Connection Position field.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


10 Select Fixed from the Connection Position Type field.

11 Click Design.

To design new deice as shown below:


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


12 Click Connect.

To connect left device terminal to right device terminals as shown below:

13 Select OK.

To save and close Device Builder dialog and return to the Edit Card Panel dialog



16 Select AT_CABLE from the CABLE Tag Types list.

17 Select N from the Tag Code list.

18 Click OK.

19 Type PC2 in New CABLE field.

20 Click OK.

21 Select BUS in the Cable Application list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


22 Select YES in the Internal Panel list.

23 Click Design.



26 Click Ok.

27 Click Save.

28 Close Edit Card Panel dialog.

29 On the Layout right-click on the Card Panel 100-PCS-100.

30 Select Connect Internal Panel Cables.

31 Connect PC2 right terminals with cable as shown.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



33 Click Swap Source\Destination.

34 Connect Cable PC2 on Card Tstrip R1-S3 at TSet 2 as shown below:




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



Exercise 1: Connecting components on the layout

Connecting Multiplexer and instruments to Brick

1 Drag and drop cable for Fieldbus Panel 100FBP007.

2 Define Source and Destination information as shown below:

3 Define cable destinations as shown below:

4 Right-click on cable 100-MUX-31291.

5 Select Connect Cores.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


6 Terminate Multiplexer cable 100-MUX-31291 on BRICK-007 at Port 1 as shown below:

Note: Observe how WHT is connected to 1+, BLK core is connected to 1- terminal, and GY is connected to 1 S terminal

7 Save connections.


9 Right-click on cable 100-LIT-31291.

10 Select Connect Cores.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


11 Connect cable 100-LIT-31291 to BRICK-007 at Port 3.

Note: Observe Cable core WHT is connected to 3+, BLK to 3- and GY to 3 S.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Connecting Fieldbus Panel cable to Marshalling Panel Tstrip

Note: To connect Fieldbus Panel Cable 100FBP007 to Marshalling Panel Tstrip 100-TS-100, we need to connect Source side of 100FBP007 to Fieldbus Terminal Strip TS-1. In the end we will connect Destination side of 100FBP007 will be terminated on 100-TS-100 and terminal set 3.

1 Select TS-1 in the Source window.

2 Connect Source side of cable 100FBP007 to Fieldbus Panel Terminal Strip TS-1 as shown below:

3 Save connections.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


5 Connect the Destination cores of 100FBP007 on Marshalling Panel Tstrip 100-TS-100 as shown below:

6 Save connections.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Connect Marshalling Panel Cable to Card Panel Device PC2

Note: We connected the Cable source cores on the Marshalling Panel's Tstrip 100-TS-100, now we need to connect Destination cores on Card Panel's Power conditioner.

1 Connect 100FMP100A cores to Card Panels device PC2 as shown below:

2 Save connections.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 2: Generating Document for Fieldbus Segment

Overall layout should look as shown below:

1 Select Fieldbus Panel 100-FBP-007.


3 Select Document Properties.

4 Select Single Brick and Multiplexer.dwg from the Templates list.

5 Select COMP-DRAW from the Doc Application list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


6 Select BRICK-007 fromthe Print Range list.

7 Click OK.

To save and close the Properties for Document dialog.

8 Select Regenerate\Save Document.

To generate the document



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review

Now that you have completed this module, let’s measure what you have learned.

Questions

1 What is the advantage of using Multiplexers?

2 What new tag types were created for Multiplexers?

Answers

1 Multiplexers reduces the cost of installing hazardous area cabling, saves installation time and space.

2 For multiplexers a new tag type AT_MUX, and for multiplexer terminal strips a new tag type AT_MUX_TSTRIP.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Course Summary
Course Summary

You have now completed the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Fundamental course.


• Generate segments, terminal strips, field panels and Card panels with H1 cards



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Course Review

Course Review


Questions

1 What components are used to build a FOUNDATION Fieldbus segment?

2 What is a splice?

3 What is a trunk?

4 What is a spur?

5 What factors come into play when building a network spanned over a large distance with baud rates of 500kbps, 250kbps, and 125kbps?

6 What is the difference between a Segment and a Network?

7 What is a terminator and what does it do?


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Course Review

Answers

1 FOUNDATION Fieldbus card, power conditioner (if not already built into the card internally), marshalling rack, junction box Tstrip, Brick(s)/termination blocks/megablocks, repeaters, instruments, spurs, trunks, terminators (internal/external).

2 A splice is a cable/pair of wires that taps off a Fieldbus device (brick) or the trunk itself and is less than 1 meter in length.

3 The trunk is the main communication cable. Components attached to the network are tapped/ branched off this cable. A segment can have many trunks depending on which style of topology is being utilized.

4 A spur cable or pair of wire that is branched off of a Fieldbus device (brick) or the trunk itself and is larger than 1 meter in length

5 There is a direct relationship between cable length and baud rate. As the baud rate speed increases, the cable length must decrease. As the current consumption increases or the cable length gets to a certain maximum limit (depending on what type of Fieldbus cable you are using) you will have to use repeaters to extend the network by creating another segment. As the baud rate decreases, the cable length can then be increased.

6 Think of a phone system in a big city consisting of many neighborhoods. The city, as a whole, is the network. The neighborhoods within that city are called segments; by putting them all together they create the network. They all come back to one central location. In our case, it is much simpler where the entire network is connected.

7 Terminators are devices that can be built into a power conditioner on a card, a T-Branch/Splitter or a brick, or can be an external device on the network all by itself. Terminators play an important role; they eliminate noise (echoing) on the network. Eliminating noise on the segment/network reduces the chance of the network either crashing or losing data. Terminators must be placed at both ends of a segment (First point being on the Card or power conditioner, Second point being on the opposite side of the segment furthest from the Master Card or power conditioner, depending on the manufacturer of the hardware you are using). Remember a network can consist of many segments; therefore it can also have many terminators (one on each end of a segment).


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Course Review


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

TRN010340-1/0002

Bentley Datasheets FundamentalsV8i (SELECTseries1)


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Trademarks



All ther brands and product names are the trademarks of their respective owners.

Patents


Copyrights


Datasheets Fundamentals 362 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Course Overview
Course Description

Datasheets let you access and manage dynamically-passed process and instrumentation data. The Datasheet module utilizes Microsoft Excel as its native format for data storage and customization. In this course, you will learn how to create, print, and revise a datasheet. You will also learn how to modify a linked datasheet field.

Target Audience


• New and existing users of Bentley or AutoPLANT software.

• Designers, engineers or anyone needing to access datasheets as a part of their job description.

Prerequisites

• Experience with Bentley Data Manager or Bentley Instrumentation & Wiring applications.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Course Objectives

Course Objectives


• Create, modify, and revise a datasheet.

• Create a mapped datasheet.

• Add a property to a datasheet.

• Use the Bulk Datasheet Builder utility.

Modules Included


• Create, Modify, and Revise a Datasheet

• Mapped Datasheets

• Bulk Datasheets

System Requirements

You must have a CD drive or Internet access for product installation. The following prerequisites are required to run the modules included in Datasheets V8i Edition:


Operating System:






DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

System Requirements




• AutoCAD 2000,2002, 2003, 2004, 2005



• ORACLE 81, 9i









DatabasesSupported:



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011




Questions

1 From which applications can you launch Datasheets?

2 Are datasheets limited to instruments only?

Answers

1 Datasheets can be launched from within the Data Manager or Instrumentation & Wiring applications.

2 No, pumps and motors can have datasheets as well.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



Prior to starting Instrumentation & Wiring, a project must be created. A project has been provided for your convenience. You will need to unzip this project onto the drive of your choice. The exercise below installs the project onto the C:\ drive.

Note: For Training purposes, the provided project was created using the Access database format. However, Instrumentation & Wiring does not support the Access database format for multi-user projects. Bentley recommends that no less than the MSDE database format be used. SQL and Oracle databases provide the most stable environments for building projects to be used by multi-users.



2 Download the file AP_FV8i_DS.zip to your desktop.

3 Click Unzip.


4 Click Close.







9 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Create, Modify and Revise a
Datasheet
Module Overview
In this module you will create a datasheet for a flow element.


• Working knowledge of Data Manager and/or Instrumentation & Wiring.

• Experience with Microsoft Excel.

Module Objectives


• Create a datasheet.

• Modify a datasheet.

• Revise a datasheet.

Feb-10 369 Create, Modify and Revise a Datasheet


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Create a Datasheet

Create a Datasheet

Exercise 1: Create a Datasheet

1 Launch Instrumentation.


A datasheet is created for this tag number.

3 Select Applications > Data Sheet Editor.

The Datasheet wizard displays.

Create, Modify and Revise a Datasheet 370 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Create a Datasheet

4 Select File > New.

5 Set the Standards radio button.

The datasheet is built from the existing project standards.

6 Click Next.

7 Select t1_temperature_instrument from the list of entries.

8 Click Next.

9 Type 100TT202 in the Document Number field.

Note: The File Name field references the Document Number field and assigns the .XLS file extension.

Feb-10 371 Create, Modify and Revise a DatasheetCopyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Create a Datasheet

Note: To assign a custom datasheet file name, clear the Automatically create File Name from Document Number check box and replace the name in the File Name field.

The custom datasheet file name is assigned.

10 Type Area 100 Temperature Transmitter 202 in the Description field.

11 Click Next.

12 Select 100-TT-202.

13 Select Add Tag Number arrow.

The tag number is allocated.

14 Click Next.

Datasheets enables you to immediately view the new datasheet.

15 Set the Open Document in Excel check box.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Create a Datasheet

16 Click Finish.

17 Select Save and Exit.


Bentley Data Manager is returned.

Exercise 2: Link a Field to the Datasheet

Linking fields to datasheets provides the best way to keep data current on the datasheet. It also allows update of the database should the datasheet be imported into the project.


2 Launch Datasheets.

3 Select File > Open.

The datasheet file opens.

4 Select Show Database Fields.

5 Expand the INSTR node.

6 Place your cursor in cell Y13.

7 Select MANUFACTR from the Database Fields list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Create a Datasheet

8 Click Set Field Link.

9 Click OK.

10 Place your cursor in cell X14.

11 Select MODEL from the Database Fields list.

12 Select Set Field Link.

13 Select Save and Exit (located above the Microsoft Excel menu).

Bentley Datasheets is returned.


Bentley Data Manager is returned.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Modifying a Datasheet


In this module you will modify a linked field, and then print the datasheets.

Exercise 1: Modify a Linked Field

1 Ensure that 100TT202.xls is the current datasheet.


The datasheet opens in Microsoft Excel.

3 Place your cursor in cell D13.

Notice the name box displays _service.

The underscore is used by Datasheets to distinguish linked cell names from ordinary cell names.

4 Type Condensate Water Temperature into cell D13.


Notice the discrepancy between the Database Value and Document Value items. The arrow between these two fields points to the value that will be updated.

6 Ensure that the arrow is pointing toward the Database Value fied.

7 Click OK.

The database is reconciled and the dialog closed.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 2: Print a Single Datasheet

1 Select Tools > Find.

This dialog enables you to locate an existing datasheet.

2 From the Datasheet Number group box, click Choose.

3 From the Database Numbers list, select 100TT202.XLS.

4 Click OK.

The Find Datasheet dialog is returned.

5 Click OK.

The Bentley Datasheet dialog is returned. The current datasheet (100TT202.XLS) displays in the File Name field.

6 Select File > Print.

The datasheet for tag number 100-TT-202 created in a previous exercise will be printed on your default printer.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Revising a Datasheet


Exercise 1: Add Revision Marks to a Datasheet

1 Select File > Revise.

2 Select A from the Rev list.

3 Ensure the Date field displays today's date.

4 Select Preliminary from the Status list.

5 Type Bentley in the By field.

6 Click OK.

The Datasheet Revisions dialog closes and the revision marks assigned to the current datasheet are saved.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


The revision is added to the datasheet.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review


Questions:

1 What is the default Microsoft application used for Datasheets?

2 If you do not want the datasheet file name to be the same as the document name, what must you do?

3 What is the purpose of the Resolve Differences dialog?

4 How does the Datasheet application know that a change has been made to either the database or the datasheet?

5 Would a revision be required every time a change is made to a datasheet?

6 What is the title of the dialog that allows you to add revisions?

Answers:

1 Microsoft Excel

2 You must disable the Automatically create File Name from Document Number check box.

3 When a change is made to a tag in either the database or the datasheet the Resolve Differences dialog allows you to choose if the change should be updated in either the database or the datasheet.

4 The cells of the datasheet are dynamically linked to the database; therefore if a change is made, there is a conflict of data when the datasheet is opened.

5 No, a revision is required only after changes are made after the document has been signed off.

6 The name of the dialog is Datasheet Revisions.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Mapped Datasheets
Module Overview

The new Datasheets engine allows users to store every field on a datasheet to the project database. The engine employs an object-based table that relates properties to a datasheet template, automatically transferring those properties to any component assigned to the template. These properties can be viewed, imported and exported outside of the datasheets environment via the Data Manager or I&W interface.


• Completion of the Instrumentation & Wiring Fundamentals course.

• Working knowledge of Process Instrumentation.

Module Objectives


• Create a mapped datasheet.

• Add a property to a datasheet.

Feb-10 381 Mapped Datasheets


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Mapped Datasheets

Mapped Datasheets

Exercise 1: Create a Mapped Datasheet

1 Select Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Project Tools > Project Administrator from the Windows Start menu.

2 Expand [+] the Training project.

3 Expand [+] Datasheets.

The datasheets for the project are listed by tag type.

Mapped Datasheets 382 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Mapped Datasheets

4 Select Edit Datasheets.

A new datasheet is added to the project.

5 Select AT_INST_ORF from the Select Tag Type list.

6 Click Add.

7 Set the System Library radio button.

8 Click OK.

9 Select INSTR.

Feb-10 383 Mapped DatasheetsCopyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Mapped Datasheets

10 Click Open.

11 Select F1_Flow_Element_Pressure_Type.xls.

12 Click Open.

The datasheet is now imported into the project and shown in the right-hand side of the Project Administrator dialog.

13 Type Flow_Orifice into the Description field.

14 Click Save.

This datasheet is now available for tags with the tag type AT_INST_ORF.

15 Select Datasheets from the navigation tree.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Mapped Datasheets

The datasheet has been added to the project.

Exercise 2: Add a Property to a Datasheet

There will be a few cells on the datasheet which may not be mapped. The following procedure will step you through adding a new property to the datasheet.

1 Select Edit Datasheets.

2 Select AT_INST_ORF from the Select Tag Type list.

3 Highlight F1_Flow_Element_Pressure_Type.

4 Click Properties.

5 Click Add.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Mapped Datasheets

6 Type NTSNote1 in the Property field.

7 Type Notes / Note 1 in the Description field.

8 Click Save.

9 Exit Project Administrator.

Exercise 3: Use the Newly Created Datasheet

1 Launch Instrumentation.

2 Select 100-TE-100.

3 Click Edit Tag.


5 Highlight 100-TE-100.

6 Click Setup.

7 Change the tag type to AT_INST_ORF.

8 Click OK.

The tag type is saved.

9 Click OK.

The Edit Loop dialog closes.

10 Select 100-TE-100.

11 Launch Datasheets.

12 Click New.

13 Verify that Standards is enabled.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Mapped Datasheets

14 Click Next.

15 Select F1_Flow_Element_Pressure_Type.

16 Click Next.

17 Type 100TE100 in the Document Number field.

18 Click Next.

19 Add 100-TE-100 to the allocated tags.

20 Click Next.

21 Click Finish.

The Resolve Differences dialog opens.

22 Click OK.

23 Place the cursor in cell B121.

24 Click Show Database Fields.

25 Expand EXT-DATA.

26 Scroll down to NTSNote1.


28 Click OK.

29 Type Area 100 Flow Meter in the cell.

30 Click Save and Close.

The Datasheet application is returned.

31 Close Datasheets.

Instrumentation & Wiring is returned.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Mapped Datasheets

Exercise 4: View the Extended Data

1 Select 100-TE-100.

2 Select View > Extended Data.

3 Scroll down and note the newly defined field NTSNote1.

4 Select NTSNote1.

5 Add NTSNote1 to the Selected window.

6 Click Save.

7 Type Orifice View in the Description field.

8 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Mapped Datasheets

9 Click View.


11 Click Close.

Instrumentation & Wiring is returned.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review

Now that you have completed this module, let's measure what you have learned.

Questions

1 Why did you select the tag type AT_ISNT_ORF before importing the datasheet?

2 What is extended data?

Answers

1 The tag type was selected so that when you are in the Datasheets application and a tag has the tag type of AT_INST_ORF, the software will make the imported sheet available to you.

2 Extended data can be imported/exported to or from a datasheet and stored in the project databases.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Bulk Datasheets
Module Overview

This module introduces you to Datasheet's Bulk Datasheet Builder utility, which creates multiple datasheets at a time.


• Completion of the Instrumentation & Wiring Fundamentals course.

• Working knowledge of Process Instrumentation.

Module Objectives


• Create bulk datasets using the Bulk Datasheet Builder utility.

Feb-10 391 Bulk Datasheets


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Bulk Datasheet Builder


Note: Bulk Datasheet Builder can now leverage data from the supplemental tables added by users, not just the BASE schema tables.

Exercise 1: Create Bulk Datasheets

1 From the Windows Start menu, select Program Files > Bentley > Plant V8i > Tools.

2 Select AT_INST_ from the Select Tag Type list.

3 Select ITYP from the Field list at the bottom left of the dialog.

4 Select TT from the = list.

The tags are filtered to three instruments.

Bulk Datasheets 392 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


5 Select 100-TT-100 and 200-TT-301 using the shift key.

6 Select Tools > Assign Templates.

7 Highlight the t1_temperature_instrument.xls template.

8 Click OK.

The dialog shows the tags and the assigned template.

9 Select Tools > Assign Datasheet Name.

10 Type DS in the Fixed Suffix field.

Note: The datasheets are created and named with the tag number then the letters DS. Other settings are left as defaulted.

11 Click OK.

12 Select Tools > Build Datasheets.

Feb-10 393 Bulk DatasheetsCopyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


All the requested datasheets are created, as tracked by a progress bar. Once complete, the dialog shows the instruments with the assigned template and datasheet.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


Exercise 2: Print Multiple Datasheets

1 Select File > Batch Print & Update.

2 Select 100TT202.XLS and 100TE100.

3 Select File > Print.

The datasheets are printed on your default printer.


The Batch Print Module closes and returns you to Bentley Datasheets.

Feb-10 395 Bulk DatasheetsCopyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review

Now that you have completed this module, let's measure what you have learned.

Questions

1 Why was AT_INST_ selected from the Tag Type field?

2 Could you have changed the location of the datasheet files?

Answers

1 AT_INST_ was selected from the Tag Type field to filter the list of instruments and make them more manageable.

2 Yes, in the Assign Datasheet Names dialog, a location other than the project could have been selected.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Course Summary
Course Summary

You have completed the Datasheet Fundamentals course.


• Create a new datasheet.

• Modify and print a datasheet.

• Add revision data to a datasheet.

• Maneuver your way through the datasheet application.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Course Review

Course Review


Questions

1 Is Datasheets a stand-alone application?

2 Can only one datasheet document be printed at one time?

3 Can data be imported into the database from the datasheet?

4 How does the software tell if there is a change in the database or the datasheet document?

5 Do you have to create datasheets one tag number at a time?

Answers

1 No, Datasheets is an application found within Data Manager and Instrumentation & Wiring.

2 No, datasheets can be printed in batches.

3 Yes, a mapped datasheet can be imported into a project and its data will populate the database upon closure of the datasheet.

4 The software compares the data and asks user to select the correct data.

5 No, using the Bulk Datasheet Builder, multiple datasheets can be generated at one time.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

TRN010910-1/0002

Bentley Hookups FundamentalsV8i (SELECTseries1)


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Trademarks



All their brands and product names are the trademarks of their respective owners.

Patents


Copyrights


Hookups Fundamentals 400 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Course Overview
Course Description

Hookups enable you to access and manage dynamically-passed process and instrumentation data. The Hookups application utilizes Microsoft Excel as its native format for data storage and customization. In this course you will create, print, and revise a hookup, as well as modifying a linked hookup field.

Target Audience


• New and existing users of Bentley or AutoPLANT software.

• Designers, engineers or anyone needing to access hookups as a part of their job description.

Prerequisites

• Completion of the Instrumentation & Wiring Fundamentals Course

• Completion of the Datasheets Fundamentals course

Course Objectives


• Create a hookup.

• Revise a hookup.

• Print a hookup.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Modules Included

• Modify a linked hookup field.

Modules Included

The following module is included in this course:

• Creating and Modifying a Hookup

System Requirements



Operating System:












DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

System Requirements




• AutoCAD 2000,2002, 2003, 2004, 2005



• ORACLE 81, 9i



DatabasesSupported:



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011




Questions

1 What is a hookup?

2 What is a Bill of Material?

Answers

1 A hookup is a document showing the detailed connection of the instrument as well as a list of all parts required to install.

2 A Bill of Material is an Excel document containing a summation of all parts.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011



Prior to starting Instrumentation & Wiring, a project must be created. A project has been provided for your convenience. You will need to unzip this project onto the drive of your choice. The exercise below installs the project onto the C:\ drive.

Note: For Training purposes, the provided project was created using the Access database format. However, Instrumentation & Wiring does not support the Access database format for multi-user projects. Bentley recommends that no less than the MSDE database format be used. SQL and Oracle databases provide the most stable environments for building projects to be used by multi-users.



2 Download the file AP_FV8i_HK.exe to your desktop.

3 Click Unzip.


4 Click Close.







9 Click OK.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Creating and Modifying a
Hookup
Module Overview
In this module you will learn to create a single and multi-tag hookup and create a Bill of Material for the multi-tag hookup. Finally, you will modify and revise the hookup.


• Working knowledge of Data Manager and/or Instrumentation & Wiring.

• Experience with Microsoft Excel.

Module Objectives


• Create a single tag hookup.

• Create a multi-tag hookup.

• Create a Bill of Material.

• Modify a hookup.

• Revise a hookup.

Feb-10 407 Creating and Modifying a Hookup


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Hookup

Creating a Hookup

Exercise 1: Create a Single Tag Hookup

1 Launch Instrumentation & Wiring.

2 Select 200-FT-300 from the Instrument list.

3 Select Hookup Editor.

The Hookup dialog opens.


5 Ensure that the Standards radio button is set.

6 Click Next.

7 Select FE Electromagnetic Flow Meter.xls.

Creating and Modifying a Hookup 408 Feb-10Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Hookup

8 Click Next.

Note: There are a limited number of hookups provided with the software. These files may be modified and saved to fit your needs.

9 Enter data in the fields as shown below.

10 Click Next.

11 Add the tag 200-FT-300 to the Allocated Tags list.

Feb-10 409 Creating and Modifying a HookupCopyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Hookup

12 Click Next.

The final dialog opens.

13 Click Finish.

The new hookup is opened in Excel format.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Hookup

14 Review the document.


The Hookup dialog returns.

16 Select Return to Instrumentation Wiring.

Exercise 2: Create a Multi-tag Hookup

1 Select 100-TT-100 from the Instrument List.




4 Ensure that the Standards radio button is set.

5 Click Next.

6 Select TT Temperature Switch.xls.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Hookup

7 Click Next.

8 Complete the fields as shown below.

9 Click Next.

10 Add the tags 100-TT-100 and 100-TT-202 to the Allocated Tags list.

11 Click Next.

12 Ensure that Open document in Excel is enabled.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Hookup

13 Click Finish.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Creating a Bill of Material


A Bill of Material creates a report summing the number of parts required for an installation for each hookup. If there are multiple tags per sheet, a multiplier will automatically be utilized to create an accurate account of the parts required.

Exercise 1: Change Data on a Hookup



3 Select Create Bill of Materials.

The Select Files dialog opens.

4 Select both files, using the CTRL key.

5 Click OK.

Two hookups were selected without error.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


6 Click OK.

7 Type Area 100 Bill of Materials in the File name field.

8 Click Save.

9 Click Yes.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011


A Bill of Materials like the one below is built and displayed.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Modifying a Hookup

Modifying a Hookup

There are several ways to manipulate the data on a hookup. You can change data, add new fields and allocate additional tags to an existing hookup. The Hookup Editor allows you to find a hookup by either the document name or by the tags that are allocated to it.

Exercise 1: Change Data on a Hookup




3 Scroll down to the bottom.

4 Type Honeywell in the Manufacturer field.

5 Type XYZ123 in the Model field.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Modifying a Hookup

6 Click Save and Exit.

Note: This dialog indicates that there is a difference between the Database and the Document. At present the update will be to the document with the values that are in the database. You will need to change the direction of the arrows to update the database with the values that were entered on the hookup.

7 Click OK.


9 Select Refresh.

10 Scroll over to the Manufacturer field. Note that the value of Rosemont has been added.

Exercise 2: Add a New Field to the Hookup





4 Click in cell H48.

5 Type SETPOINT.

6 Select Show Database Fields.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Modifying a Hookup

7 Expand the INSTR node.

8 Click on cell I48.

9 Select SETPOINT from the list of fields.


11 Click OK.

12 Click on the field and note that the field name has changed to _SETPOINT.

13 Type 15PSIG in the field.


15 Click on the arrows to change the direction of the arrows to point to the Database Value field.

16 Click OK.


18 Select Refresh.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Modifying a Hookup

19 Scroll over to the SetPoint field and note the value of 15PSIG has been added.

Exercise 3: Allocate an Additional Tag to a Hookup



3 Select Find Tag.

4 Select the Choose for the Hookup Number field.

5 Select 200FT3001.XLS.

6 Click OK.

The Find Tag dialog is returned.

7 Click OK.

The hookup 100FT300.xls is now the active hookup.

8 Select Allocate next to the Allocate Tag Number field.

9 Select AT_INST_ in the Tags with Tag Type Like list.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Modifying a Hookup

10 Click Add.

The available tag 200-FT-300 is added to the Allocated Tags list.

11 Click OK.


13 Scroll to the bottom to see the update.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Revise a Hookup

Revise a Hookup

Exercise 1: Add a Revision Note to a Hookup

1 Select 100-TT-100 from the Instrument List.


3 Select Revise in the Latest Revision Number group box.

4 Fill out the appropriate fields as shown below.

Note: Use lists where applicable.

5 Click OK.

The Hookup Editor returns.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Revise a Hookup

The document has been updated to show the current revision.


The Hookup Editor returns.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Module Review

Module Review


Questions:

1 How do you add a revision to a hookup?

2 When does the Resolve Differences dialog appear?

Answers:

1 Select Revise on the Hookup Editor dialog to launch the Hookup Revision dialog.

2 The Resolve Differences dialog appears when there is a conflict between the database and the hookup document.


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011
Course Summary
Course Summary

You have completed the Hookups Fundamentals course.


• Create a new hookup.

• Modify and revise a hookup.

• Create a bill of materials from the hookups.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Meg

acad

Inge

nier

ia y

Sis

tem

as S

.A.S

.

Cla

ss D

ate:

18-

Jul-2

011

Course Review

Course Review


Questions

1 Can you allocate additional tags to a hookup if the installation configuration is the same?

2 Can you find a hookup by tag number instead of document number?

3 Do you have to update the document with the information from the database?

Answers

1 Yes, using the Allocate Tags option.

2 Yes, you can find a hookup document by its tag number.

3 It would depend on which information is the most current. If the document has more current information, do not update the data when opening the data. You would update the database when closing the document.


bentley instrumentation and wiring design fundamentals v8i(ss1) edition trn011660 10002 megacad...

Documents

trademarks bentley

course objectives

bentley software

course review

course description

course summary

b bentley logo

module overview